· ARCHIVES i

SERIAL !

10

The University of Newcastle

FACULTY OF SCIENCE and MATHEMATICS

HANDBOOK

The University of Newcastle

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

HANDBOOK

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCAS1LE New South Wales

LocaUOD Address: Rankin Drive, Shortland

Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW. 2308

Telephone: (049) 680401

Telex: AA28194 - Ii"'"" AA28618 - Bursar

AA28784 - 1UNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited)

Facsimile: (049) 601661

Hours of BusIness: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm

The University of Newcastle Calendar consists oftbe following volumes:

Volume 1

Volume 2

Volume 3

Volume 4

VolumeS

Volume 6

Volume 7

Volume 8

Volume 9

Volume 10

Volume 11

Legislation

University Bodies and Staff

Faculty of Architecture Handbook:

Faculty of Arts Handbook

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook:

Faculty of Education Handbook

Faculty of Engineering Handbook

Faculty of Medicine Handbook:

Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook

Schools of Administration & Technology, Education, Health and Visual & Perfonning Arts Handbook

Faculty and Conservatorium of Music Handbook

Also available are the Undergraduate Guide and Postgraduate Prospectus

This volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

The colour band, Topaz BCC4, on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Science of this University. The colour band, Amethyst Bee 28. in the center of the cover is the lining colour of the hood Bachelors of Mathematics of this University.

The information in this Handbook is correct as al15th November, 1989.

ISSN 1034 - 4489

Recommended Price: Four donars and fifty cents plus postage.

Designed by: Marie-TWisniowski

Typeset by: The Secretary's Division, The University of Newcastle

Printed by: Newey and Beath, Belford Street, Broadmeadow

THE DEAN'S FOREWORD

Welcome to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. Amalgamation with the former Hunter Institute of Higher Education and the Newcastle Consetvatorium of Music took place on 1 November, 1989 and consequently there are many changes occurring in the University in physical location and in course diversity.

Commencing in 1990 the Regulations of all courses in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are new and reflect the adoption of acredit point system and the move to semesterisation. This has resulted in changes to the content of all subjects. Accordingly, students need to carefully read the Regulations for their degree and the subject entry outlines contained in this Handbook. Great care will be needed when selecting appropriate combinations of subjects for your degree.

Students who are pursuing Mathematics orScience degree courses should be aware that they can apply to undertake subjects in Computer Science (offered within the Faculty of Engineering) but because of strict quota restrictions on entry to this subject, may not be successful. Statistics is also available (offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce) as a subject which could be pursued in the degree programme.

To the newly arriving students in Science and Mathematics may I offer a little advice. The system of instruction at university is vastly different from that in secondary schools. The onus is placed on the student to extract the maximum benefit from the COurse. University staff will lecture to you and during that time you are expected to make notes about the material being discussed. Some students respond by trying to take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others listen and make notes in outline form, copying down quotations or blackboard material, While a minority, overwhelmed by the volume and complexity of the subject matter, simply contemplate their next social engagement to their own disadvantage. Two things are important here. The first is the development of an efficient system of note taking and in this field the Student Counselling Unit provides short courses. The other is that, apart from tutorials and final

examinations, no one follows up your comprehension of the lecture material other than yourself. The faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your own time on private study for every contact hour that you have with University staff. You need to allocate this time from the very beginning of your course and if you delay in starting, then the amount of time needed to catch up with your subjects will increase proportionately. A well planned, unifonn programme of work to support your lectures, to torials and laboratory classes will allow you the time to develop your understanding of the subjects and enjoy the many other facets of university life.

If this University has a heart it must surely reside in the Auchrnuty Library. The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your ability to make efficient use of this vital facility. Make sure you take part in the orientation programmes which the Library staff offerat the beginning of every year. Throughout your course the teaching staff of the University are here to guide you alongthe path of self-education and if you need assistance it is available at anumberoflevels. Difficulties with particular subjects should be discussed with the lecturer concerned or the Year Supervisor in the relevant Department. Problems with your degree structure and progression are the province of the Dean and Sub-Deans who will provide guidance when required. Day to day changes in your current enrolment are handled by the Faculty Secretary who can be found in the School Office in Room VI8 in the Mathematics Building.

In a climate where government charges for tertiary education have risen steeply, you must make the most of your time at University by using its resources to the full. Learn to organize your thoughts, expand your mind, and develop your critical faculties to the utmost in order to provide yourself with qualifications which will lead to a successful and satisfying career.

B.A. ENGEL, Dean

CONTENTS

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MA THEMA TICS

SECI10NONE FACULTY STAFF

SECI10NTWO FACULTY INFORMATION

SECI10NTHREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREEIDIPLOMA REGULATIONS

Undergraduate DlplomalDegrees offered In the Faculty General Regulations

Combined Degree Course Regulations Bachelbr or Science Bachelor or Science (psychology) Bachelor or Science (Aviation) Diploma in Aviation Science Bachelor or Mathematics (Ordinary)

Combined Degree Courses

SECI10N FOUR PROGRAMMES SUBJECT LIST

SECI10N FIVE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Guide to Undergraduate SUbject Entries

SECI10N SIX

Biological Sciences Chemistry Geology Mathematics Physics Aviation Psychology Computer Science Geography Information Science Statistics Additional Bachelor or Mathematics Subject Descriptions

POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS

Postgraduate Courses Doctor or Philosophy Bachelor of Science (Honours) Bachelor or Mathematics (Honours) Diploma In Coal Geology Diploma In Mathematical Studies Diploma In Psychology Diploma In Science Masters Degrees

Master of Mathematics Master of Psychology (Clinical)/Mas<er of Psychology (Educational) Master of Science Master of Scientific Studies

1

8

13

13 13 14 15 15 15 16 16 16

18 24

35

35 35 39 43 46 57 60 64 69 71 74 75 77

79

79 80 81 83 8S 8S 86 87 88 89 90 91 91

CONTENTS

SECI10N SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

SECI10N EIGHT LIST OF SUBJECTS

SECI10N NINE GENERAL INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL DATES 1990 (including Medicine) Advice and Information Faculty Secretaries

Accommodation Officer

Cashier's Office Careers and Student Employment Officer

Counselling Service

Health Service

Student Loans

Students with Special Needs Enrolment of New Students Transfer of Course Re-Enrolment by Continuing Students Re..Enrolment Kits

Lodging Application for Re·Enrolment Forms

Enrolment Approval

Payment of Charges

Late Payment Student Cards Re·Admission after Absence Attendance Status Change of Address Change of Name Change of Programme Withdrawal Confirmation of Enrolment Failure to Pay Overdue Debts Leave of Absence Attendance at Classes General Conduct Notices Student Matters Generally

EXAMINATIONS Examination Periods Sitting for Examinations Rules for Formal Examinations Examination Results Special Consideration

UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - REGULATIONS CHARGES

Method of Payment Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Scholarship Holders and Sponsored Students Loans Refund of Charges

CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING

93

102

located between pages 42 and 43

II ii ii ii ii ii ii II

iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv v v

v v

v v

v vi

vii vii vii

viii viii viii viii

SECTION ONE

FACULTY STAFF

Dean B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD

Sub-Deans

E.I. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), ARACI

W. Brisley. BSc(Syd), MSc(NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)

Faculty Secretary H. R. Hotchkiss, BA, DipEd(NE)

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES Professor B. Boettcher, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department)

Associate Professors

R.C. Jones, BSc{NSW), PbD(Syd)

J.W. Patrick, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)

T.K. Roberts, BSc(Adel), PhD(F1in)

RJ. Rose, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)

Senior Lecturers B.A. Conroy, BSe, PhD(Syd)

R.N. Murdoch, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)

I.e. Rodger, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)

Lecturer C.E. Orner, BSc, PhD(Adel)

Researcb Associate M.R.Thomas, BSc, PhD

Honorary Associate I.D.Stanger, BSc (James Cook), PhD

SECfIONONE

Tutors M. Conroy, BSc, Dip Ed(Syc;l), PGDip Plant & Wildlife llIus(NCAE)

1. Fitter, BSc

I. Kyd, BSc(NSW), DipEd(Syd)

P. Lake, BSc, MSc(Tor)

Teaching Assistant K. Mate, BSc

Departmental Office Staff

D. Snushall

D. Jarvie

ProCessional Officers

D.l. Kay, BSc(Adel), PhD

J. Clulow, BSc, BA. PhD

Technical Officers

R. Campbell

RJ. Taylor

M.Lin

E. SlaTk

Laboratory Craflsperson M. Ward

Laboratory Assistants

D.L. Brennan

T.D. Frost

E.D. Murray

LD.Pezely

K. Stokes

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY ProCessors

K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(OxO (Personal Chair)

W.F.J. Pickering, MSc, PhD(NSW), DSc, ASTC, FRACI

Associate ProCessors

LX. Dyall, MSc,PhD(Melb), FRACI

L.A. Summers, BSc, PhD(Glas}, FRACI

Senior Lecturers

K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACI (Head oCDepartment)

R.A. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld}, ARACI

G.A. Lawrance, BSc, PhD(Qld}, DipEd(Melb), FRACI

E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), ARACI

Ledurers

R.C. Bums, BSc, PhD(Melb), ARACI

M. Maeder, PhD (Basel)

Senior Tutor G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), ARACI

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

Honorary Research Associate D.AJ. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(penn), ASTC, FRACI

2

SECfIONONE

DepartmentaJ Office Staff

E. Siabbert

M.Munns

ProCessional Officer Vacant

Technical Officers

A.I. Beveridge

R.F. Godfrey

J. Slavek

W.J. Thompson

Laboratory Assistant T Williams

DEPARTMENT OF GEOWGY ProCessor I.R. Plimer, BSc(NSW), PhD(Macq) (Head oCDepartment)

Associate ProCessors

CP.K. Diessel, DiplGeoI, DrRerNat(Berlin), AAusIMM, FAIE

BA Engel, MSc(NE), PhD

Senior Lecturers

R. Orner, BSc, PhD(Adel)

P.K. Seccombe, MSc(Melb), PhD(Manit)

Lecturer W. Collins, BSc(ANU), PhD (Lan

Honorary A:;soclate

M.R. Salehi, BSc(Tehran), PhD (N'cle,UK)

Departmental Office Staff G. MacKenzie

Professional Officer G.L. Dean-Jones, MSc(Macq)

Technical Officers

R. Bale, BSc

E. Krupic

JA. Crawford

Laboratory Assistant W.H. Crehert

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Professor Vacant

AssOciate Profe&'lors

W. Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)

CA. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhD(Camb), PAIP, FInstP(Lond)

J.R. Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL

P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSc, RNDr(Charles(Prague» (Head of Department)

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

3

SECfIONONE

Senior Lecturers

B. Sims BSc, PhD

W.T.F. Lau, ME(NSW), PhD{Syd)

D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Cant». MACS

W.P. Wood, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRAS

Lecturers I.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster)

R.F. Berghoul, MSc(Syd)

J.O. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE)

I.A. MacDougall, BSc(Dalhousie), MA(Dalhousie), MPhil(Waterloo)

W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)

E. Vlachynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)

Senior Tutor R. Buchholz, BMath

Tutors S. Boswell, BMath

N.E. Hannah, BMath(Hons)

S. Seiffert BMath

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

Professor Emeritus R.o. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS

Departmental Secretary J. Garnsey, BA(Syd)

L. Steel

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS Professor R.I. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW), PAIP

Associate Professors

BJ. Fraser, MSc(NZ), PhD(Cant), PAIP, FRAS(Head of Department)

C.S.L. Keay, MSc(NZ), PhD(Cant), MA(Tor). CPhys, PIP, PAIP, FAAAS, FRNZAS, FRAS, MACS

P.V. Smith, BSc, PhD(Monash), MAIP

Senior Lecturers

P.T. Bagnall, BSc(NSW), MSc(NE), PhD, MAIP

1.E.R. Cleary, MSc(NSW)

P.A. McGovern, BE, BSc(Qld), MS, PhD(CaITech), MIEEE, SMIREAust

D.l. O'Connor, BSc, PhD(ANU), PAIP

Rll. Roberts, BE(NSW), MSc, ASTC

Lecturers

B.V. King, BSc, BE, PhD(NSW)

P.W. Menk, BSc, PhD(LaT), MAIP

Research Associates

B.1. O'aig, BMath, PhD

H.J. Hansen, MSc, PhD(Natal)

A. Kahn, MSc, MS, PhD(Illinois, USA)

M. Kato, BSc, MS, PhD(Waseda, Tokyo)

Honorary Research Associates

D. Webster, BSc, PhD

l.A. Ramsay, MSc(Melb), PhD, PAIP

4

SECfIONONE

Departmental Omce Staff

E. Cadell

T. Cameron

J.Oyston

Computer Programmer A. Nicholson

professional Officer Vacant

Senior Technical Officers

B.Mason

M.K.O'Neill

I.F. Pearson

I.S. Ratcliffe

Technical Officers

T.W.Bums

M.M. Cvetanovski

I.e. Foster

F. McKenzie

I.F. Pearson

Senior Laboratory Craftsperson B. Stevens

Laboratory Craftsperson P. Greig

AVIATION PROGRAMME

PACUL TY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMA TICS STAfF

Associate Professor R.A. Telfer, BA(NSW), MEdAdmin(NE), PhD, DipEdAdmin(NE), (DIrector, Institute of Aviation)

Lecturers

I. Henley, BEd(Alberta), MA(Alberta), MEd(Manitoba)

D. Christley, BA(Macq)

Senior Research Assistant M.J. Ross,BA(Melb), GradDipAppPsych(Chisholm)

Institute Omce Staff S. Petrov

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Professor M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), PAPsS, MAPsS

ASSOCiate Professors

D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS, (Head of Department)

D.M. Kea<" BA(Syd), MEd, PhD(Qld), DipEd(Syd), FAP,s, MSAANZ

Senior Lecturers

M.M. Conon, MA, PhD(NE), MAPsS

R.A. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM)

M. Hunter, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS

N.F. Kat"" BA, PhD(ANU), MAP,s

1. Kenardy, BSc, PhD(Qld»

D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), CertSocSt(Glas), DipData(SA),MAPsS

H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS, AAIM

I.L Seggie, BA, PhD

I.D.C. Shea, MA(Cont), PhD(Qld) MASH, MASSERT, MACPCP

5

SECfIONONE

Lecturers CE. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAP.s

S.A. McFadden. BA, PhD(ANU)

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

Emeritus Professor I.A. Keats, BSc(Adel), BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FBPsS, FAPsS

Honorary Associates

M. Arthur, BA, D;pP,!,ch(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAP.s

D.B. Dunlop, MB, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACO

B. Fenelon. BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS. AAAN. MSPR

I. Miles, BA. PhD F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FBPsS

1.W. Staines, BA, BEc(Syd), BEd(Melb), PhD(Lond), MBPsS, FAPsS

Departmental Office StafT W.N.Mead

H. Finegan S. Harris

Professional Officer Rl. Price, BSc, PhD

Senior Technical Officers

R.Gleghom

A.O. Harcombe

L. Cooke

Technical Officers

H. Daniel, BE E.M.Huber

1. Lee·Chin

K.A. Shannon, BA

P.W.Smith

Laboratory Crallsperson M. Newton

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY Professor EA. Colhoun, BA(Belf), MS(Wis), PhD(BeIQ. MA(Dub) (Head of Department)

Associate Professors I.C.R. Camm, MSc(Hull). PhD

D.N. Parkes, BA(Dunelm), MA, PhD

Senior Lecturers

H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD(Wis)

M.R. Hall, MA(Manc)

W.1.A. 10005, BA(NSW), MA, PhD(PNO), DipEd(NSW)

RJ. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSc, PhD(NE)

J.C. Thmer, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis)

Lecturers

K.W. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE)

a.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD

6

SECfIONONE

Honorary Associates

BL.Campbell, MSc Honoris causa

W.P. Geyl, BSc(Lond), DrsPhysGeog(Ulrecht)

Departmental Office StatT M.B.Lane

Cartographer CJ.Harden

Technical Officer N. G. Gardner

Computer Programmer RJ.Dear

Map Librarian A.M. Haynes

DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS

Professor AJ. Dobson, BSc(Adel), MSc, PhD(James Cook) (Head or Department)

Associate Professor R.W. Gibberd, BSe, PhD(Adel)

Senior Lecturers

B.O. Quinn, BA, PhD(ANU)

D.P. Sinclair, BSc, MSrat(NSW), MS, PhD(FIorida State)

Lecturer

A.L. Pope, MSc(Syd), MSc(ANU), PhD(Lond)

StaUsttcal Programmer C. Thitkettle, BComm, DipCompSc

Departmental Secretary C. Claydon

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

7

SECTION TWO

FACULTY INFORMATION

The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Electrical Engineering & Computer Science, Geography and Statistics also offer major sequences of quaIif ying subjects f orthe degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

Transition Arrangements This section on transition arrangements only applies to students enrolled before 1990.

From 1990 there are new Regulations Governing the Bachelor of Mathematics, Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science (Psychology) Degrees and the Diploma in A~ation Science offered in the Faculty of Science and Matherna11cs.

Conversion Patterns For 1990

Transition for current students to the new credit point system requires conversion by the following formula:

Part 1 subjects - 12 credit points

Part n subjects - 18 credit points

Part ill subjects - 24 credit points

Examples:

4-3-2 Pattern 5-2-2 Pattern

100 level

Chemistry I 12 Physics lA 12

Biology I 12 Geology I 12

Mathematics I 12 Chemistry I 12

Geography I 12 Biology I 12 Japanese I 12

48 60

8

200 level

Chemistry ITA 18 Geology TIA 18

Chemistry TIB 18 Geology TIB 18

Biology IIA 1Ji 54 36

300 level

Biology lilA 24 Geology lIlA 24

Chemistry rnA 24 Geology llIB 24

48 48

Total 150 Total 144

It should be noted that in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics any candidate who enrolled under regulations prior to 1990 is to meet the requirements of regUlations, including the equivalent of the specific nine subject degree pattern (4-3-2 or 5-2-2), in existence when the candidate commenced the course.

Exceptional Circumstances Arising in Transition

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular transition cases the Dean may determine the transition

program 10 be followed.

General Information for New Undergraduates Students embarking on a university course for the first time ~ay find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary., education makes a number of demands on students: it requires ; them to be self.disciplined, organized, self·motivated ~d i moreover, responsible for their own course of study. He~ce l~ IS ~ important that students become familiar with the Uroverslty ,! structure degree courses offered and service organizations (such 1 aslhe university CounsellingService &AccommodationServict j etc.) which offer assistance with study, personal and housing i problems. ij

I

SECfIONTWO

Often students onfirst entering University are not certain of their final field of interest. In fact, it is usually anI y afterthecompletion of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major in a particular subject. In order to maintain flexibility first year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from areas where the student has some previous expertise or special interest. At the same time, they should take note of the degree requirements, particularly with regard 10 compulsory subjects, advisory/compulsory prerequisites and corequisites as set oul in the appropriate degree/diploma regUlations in this handbook.

Students should note that degrees must be structured to include a specified number of 300 level semester subjects. Forexample, aBachelor of Sciencedegree must include four3oo level semester subjects in one Department, and at least four more 300 level semester SUbjects chosen from those approved by Faculty Board. Subject to the Dean's permission, a candidate for the degree of BachelorofScienceis, in general, permitted to enrol in upl0 nine semester subjects from amongst thoseoffered by another Faculty. Similarly, a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may count up to four semester subjects offered in other degree courses and a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics may enrol in up to eight semester subjects from another Faculty.

Time limits are set on the duration of an undergraduate course as indicated in the appropriate regUlations. Maximum workloads are also preset, since limits are placed on the number of subjects students are pennittedto undertake in anyone year. Forinfonnation on these restrictions consult the appropriate degree regulations.

Undergraduate Admission Requirements (1) In order to be considered for admission for any qualification

otherthan a postgraduate qualification an applicant shall be required to:

(a) either:

(i) attain such aggregate of marks in approved subjects tJl the one New South Wales Higher School Certificate examination as may be prescribed by the Senate from time to time; or

(ii) otherwise satisfy the Admissions Committee that the student has reached a standard of education sufficient to enable pursuit of the approved course; and

(b) satisfy any prerequisites prescribed for admission 10 the course leading to that qualification.

(2) The aggregate of marks prescribed by the Senate shall be determined by aggregating the marks gained in up to 10 units or, where more than 10 units are presented, the 10 units having the highest marks.

Advisory Prerequisites for Entry to the Faculty There are no prescribed prerequisites for entry to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will commence on the assumption that all students will have achieved the leVel indicated.

Subject

Biology 101

FACULTY INFORMATION

Advisory prerequisites

Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4~ unit Science is appropriate and students are advised to include CHEM101 and CHEMI02in their University programme. However, some lectures in background chemistry will be offered by the Depart.. ment of Community Programmes prior to the start of the first semester. Attendance at this Preparatory Course is optional.

Chemistry 101 At least Mathematics (2~unit course), Chemistry (2·unit course), and Physics (2· unit course), with ranking in thetop50%in each case.

Geology 101 2·units of Science (preferably Chemistry) and at least 2·units of Mathematics.

Mathematics 101 Mathematics (2·unit course), or higher.

Mathematics 102 Mathematics at 3·unit level with a scare of at least 110/150 in 3-unit, or have passed Mathematics 101

Physics 101 HSC 2·unit Mathematics with a performance level in the top 30% of the candidature for this subject. While this is an advisory prerequisite in 1990, il will become mandatory in 1991.

Physics 102 HSC 3·unit Mathematics mark of at least 110/150. Physics 2·unit or Science 4·unit with a performance level in the top 50% of candidature for these SUbjects. While these are advisory prerequisites in 1990 the y will become mandatory in 1991.

Aviation 101-104 2·unit, 3·unitor4·unitMathematics. Also, 2·unit Physics or 4·unit Science (including the Physics 'make·up· electives) with a level of perfonnance placing them in the top 50% of the candidature for these subjects.

Mature Age Entry

Entry into the University is available to persons who will be at least 21 years of age by 1st March of the year in which enrolment is sought and who have completed a limited New South Wales HigherSchool Certificate Programme. Subjects which will enable entry into the Faculty of Science and Mathematics include four units selected from Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (3~unit course preferred), and 4·unit Science. For entry into the Bachelor ofMathematicsdegree.include2-unitmathematics(3·unitcourse preferred} and one other subject recognised for admission purposes. The subjects should be presented as 2·unit courses with a result in the top 50%.

Limit on Admission

Where the Council is of the opinion that a limit should be placed upon the number of persons who may in any year be admitted to a course or part of a course or to the University, -it may impose

9

SECfIONTWO

such a limit and determine the manner of selection of those persons to,be so admitted.

Enrolment Requirements

(a) In order to be admitted an applicant shall:

(i) satisfy appropriate Diploma/Degree Regulations as set out in Section 1bree;

(ti) receive approval to enrol;

(ill) complete the prescribed enrolment procedures; and

(iv) pay any fees and charges prescribed by the Council.

(b) An applicant may be admitted under such conditions as the Admissions Committee may determine after considering any advice offered by the Dean of the Faculty.

(e) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board a candidate for a qualification shall nol enrol in a subject which does not count towards that qualification.

(d) A candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a course or part of a courseforanotherqualification unless thecandidate has first obtained the consent ofthe Dean of the Faculty and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that otberqualification, the Dean of that Faculty: provided that a student may enrol in a combined degree course approved by the Senate leading to two qualifications.

(e) A candidate for any qualification otber than a postgraduate qualification who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a normal full-time programme shall be deemed to be a full­time student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part­time course or less than three-quarters of a full-time programme shall be deemed to be a part-time student

Enrolment Status

A candidate for a qualification shall enrol as either a full-time student or a part-time student.

Combined Degree Courses The decision to take a combined degree course is usually taken at the end of a student's first year in his original degree course, in consultation with the Deans of the Faculties responsible for the two degrees. Permission to embark on a combined degree course will nonnally require an average of credit levels in first year subjects.

Non-Degree Students

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in these . Regulations, the Admissions Committee may on the recommendation of the Head of a Department offering any part of acourse permit a person, not being a candidate for aqualificatiCll of the University, to enrol in any yearinthat part of the course on payment of such fees and charges as may be prescribed by the Council. A person so enrolling shall bedesignateda 'non-degree' student.

10

FACULTY INFORMATION

Faculty Policy in Regard to Standing for Courses Completed Elsewhere The Faculty Board may grant standingin specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to amaximum of 60 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions determined by the Faculty Board. Such standing to be granted may include no more than 48 points at 100 level, 24 points at 200 level and 12 points at 300 level.

Additional Information Advisory Services

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty. In particular, advice should be sought from first, second and third year subject co-ordinators in each Department, Heads of Departments, the Sub-Deans or Dean.

Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary in the School of Science and Mathematics in the Mathematics Building (Room V1S).

For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students should consult the University Counselling Service.

Student Participation in University Affairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University bodies. Election of student members usually takes place early in first term and students should watch Departmental notice boards for details of election of student members.

The Faculty Board of the Faculty of ScienceandMathematicshas provision for the election of four student members.

SUbject Timetable Clashes

Students are strongly advised to check on possible timetable clashes before enrolling. Clashes may f oree students to take those subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always willing to advise students, it is the student's responsibility to ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in their proposed courses.

Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with 1

that of another, this may notnecessarily mean that. this combination j cannot bedone. Often an arrangement can be made by oneorboth j Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. { Therefore, see the Departmental representatives before deciding } upon your final subject combinations. 1

j , Workload 1

The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of ~ their time to degree studies is four subjects (24 credit points) per ~ semester. In the case of subjects offered over afull year (12 credit i points), the workload will berated as 6 credit points per semester. ,

SECfIONTWO

Enrolment in excess of 24 credit points per semester can only be exceeded in exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic record and requires the permission of the Dean.

Students with external commitments, such as part-time employment, should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for written work, or failure to attend examinations s"ome of which may be scheduled on Saturday mornings.

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and, in particular, attention is drawn to the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. The follOwing should be borne in mind:

1. The Faculty Board requires that students shall pass at least two semester subjects in their first year of full-time attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance.

2. The Faculty Board requires that students shall have passed at least eight semester subjects by the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or four years of part-time attendance.

3. The Faculty Board has determined that a student who fails a semester subject twice shall not be permitted to include that subject in the candidate's future programme, and that a student who fails four semester subjects twice shall be excluded from further enrolment in the Faculty, unless the candidate shows cause to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board why the candidate should be permitted to do so.

4. Students should note that a terminating pass can be awarded only at the 100 level or 200 level and that no more than four terminating passes may count in a student's programme (with no more than two at the 200 level.)

~ote: Whe~ there is a change in attendance status, two part­time years will be taken as the equivalent of one full-time year for the purposes of this policy.

Examinations Regulations

These regulations are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.

Unsatisfactory Progress

Additional regUlations are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.

Record of Failure

~ .ap~licant who has a record of failure at another tertiary mStitutlOn shall not be admitted unless that applicant first satisfies

(a) the Faculty Board or the Doctoral Degree Committee for the Faculty as appropriate, in the case of a postgraduate qUalification; or

(b) the Admissions Committee, in the case of any other qualification;

that there is a reasonable prospect that the applicant will make satisfactory progress.

FACULTY INFORMATION

Re-enrolment

A candidate for a qualification shall be required to re-enrol annually during the period of this candidature. Upon receiving approval to re-enrol the candidate shaIl complete the prescribed procedures and pay the fees and charges determined by the Council not later than the date prescribed for payment.

Teacher Training Courses Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units

Students who intend to proceed to a Diplomain Education should familiarise themselves with the prerequiSites for units offered in the course.

These prerequisites are staled in terms of subjects of the Universil y of Newcastle. Applicants whose courses of study have included subjects which are deemed for this purpose to provide an equivalent foundation may be admitted to the Diploma course as special cases.

In ~e Diploma course the Problems in Teaching, and Learning uruts are grouped as follows:

(a) Secondary:

English

History

Social Science (Geography,Commerce, Social Science) Mathematics

Science

Modem Languages (French, German, Japanese)

(b) Primary

Prerequisites

For information about prerequisites, students are invited to contact the Faculty Secretary. Faculty of Education, Ext.417, Room W329.1bis contact should be made in the early stages of a degree course.

All secondary methods

Normally at least 30 credit points (12-100;18-200 level) of a degree in the main teaching area and 12 credit points (12-100 level) of a degree in any subsidiary area Modem Languages, Drama, Science and Social Sciences have additional specific requirements.

Primary method

At least 30 credit points (12-100;18-200 level) of a degree in a specified area and 12-100 level credit points of a degree in each of two others. The specified areais usually a secondary teaching area

Further details may be obtained from the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education, ext.417, Room W329.

Mathematics Education Subjects

Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics intending a career in teaching may wish to include professional studies related directly to teaching in addition to, and concurrently with,

11

SECfIONTWO

the normal course of study in the second and third years by enrolling in Mathematics Education II and Mathematics Education m. the contents of which are set out under Extraneous Subjects.

Role of Faculty Board, Faculty of Scieuce and Mathematics The role of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics is defined by By·Law 24.4, which states:

"Subject to the authority of the Council and the Sena1eand to any resolution thereof, a Faculty Board shall:

(a) encourageandsupervisetheteachingandresearchactivities of the Faculty;

(b) detennine the nature and extent of examining in the subjects in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty;

(c) detennine the grades of pass to be awarded and the conditions for gaining deferred or special examinations in respect of the subjects in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty;

(d) detennine matters concerning admissions, enrolment and progression in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty and make recommendations on such of those matters as require consideration by the Admissions Committee;

(e) consider the examination results recommended in respect of each ofthe candidates for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty and take action in accordance with the Examination Regulations made by Council under By-Law 5.9.1;

(f) deal with any matter referred to it by Senate;

(g) make recommendations to Senate on any matter affecting the Faculty;

(h) exercise such other powers and duties as may from time to time be delegated to it by the Council".

Professional Recognition Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are recognized by a number of different professional societies dep ending on their degree majors.

Biological Sciences

The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated in 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profession in Australia, to promote education and research in Biology and to improve communication between Biologists of different disciplines. The Institute confers on its members a status similar to that for other Australian professional institutes. Membership grades are: Fellow, Member, Associate and Student. Members and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction in Biology and nomination from the existing membership. Membership requires a first or second class honours degree in Biology and three years relevant experience, or a pass degree with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years

12

FACULTY INFORMATION

relevantexperience,oraPhD.AnAssociaterequiresanappropriate pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology.

Chemistry

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science(Honours) majoring in Chemistry, may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.

Geology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science(Honours) majoring in Geology may join the Geological Society of Australia Inc., the Australian Institute of Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.

Mathematics

For employment as a Mathematician, graduates should have at least one majorin Mathematics. An Honours degree is preferred by many employers. The profession is represented by the Australian Mathematical Society.

Physics

Foremployment as a physicist, students musthaveaminimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An honours degree in Physics orcombined PhysicsjMathematics would be preferred.

Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in tenns of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no fonnal conditions for registration as a physicist.

Psychology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoringin Psychology or a Bachelor of Science(psychology) may join the Australian Psychological Society. Membership nonnally requires a four year degree in psychology. Provision is also made for Student Subscribers and Affiliates.

SECTION THREE

,UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE/DIPLOMA REGULATIONS

Undergraduate DiplomalDegrees offered in the Faculty of Scieuce and Mathematics Bachelor of Science

Bachelor of Science (Aviation)

Diploma of Aviation

Bachelor of Science (Psychology)

Bachelor of Mathematics

Regulations Governing the Ordinary Bachelor Degrees offered in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics Part I - General Regulations 1. General

These regulations prescribe the conditions and requirements relating to the degrees of Bachelor of Science, BaChelor of Science (Aviation), Bachelor of Science (Psychology) and Bachelor of Mathematics of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.

2. Definitions

In these Regulations, Schedules and Ustsattached thereto, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicate or require:

"course" f means a group 0 semester subjects selected in confonnity with the conditions prescribed for each degree;

"the Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;

"the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science (Aviation), Bachelor of Science (psychology) and Bachelor of Mathematics as the case may be;

"Department" means the department offering a particular semester subject or various combinations thereof and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"SChedule" means the Schedule to these Regulations relevant to the course in which a person is enrolled or proposing to enrol;

"semester subject" means any programme of study which aggregates to a total of 6 (six) credit points and for which aresult may be recorded. For the purpose of this definition two 3 (three) credit point subjects can be equated to one semester subject. Semester subjects shall be classified as 1 00, 200, 300 or400 level by the Faculty Board.

3. Admission

An applicant for admission to candidature shall satisfy the requirements of the Regulations Governing Admission and Enrolment and such other additional requirements as may be specified in the appropriate degree Schedules and Subject Lists.

4. Enrolment

(I) In any semester, a candidate shall enrol only in those semester subjects or their equivalent approved by the Dean or the Dean's nominee.

(2) Except with the approval of the Dean, given only if the Deanis satisfied that the academic merit of the candidate so

13

SECTION TIlREE

warrants, a candidate shall not enrol in more than four semester subjects or their equivalent in anyone semester.

(3) A candidate may not enrol in any semester in any combination of semester subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that semester.

5. Prerequisites and Corequisites

(1) The Faculty Board, on therecommendalion of the Head of Department, may prescribe prerequisites and/or corequisites for any semester subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board, granted after considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a semester subject unless that candidate has satisfied its prerequisites and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any semester subject prescribed as its corequisite.

6. Semester SUbject

(1) Tocompleteasemester subject orits equivalent, acandidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field-work and submit such written or other work as the Department or Departments shall require.

(2) To pass a semester subject or its equivalent, a candidate shall complete all requirements and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

(3) Theresults obtained by asuccessful candidate in a semester subject or its equivalent shall be: High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Tenninating Pass.

7. Standing

(1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to a maximum of 60 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions detennined by the Faculty Board. Such standing to be granted may include no more than 48 points at 100 level, 24 points at 200 level and 12 points at 300 level.

(2) A candidate may not present for the degree studies which have been counted previously towards a degree or diploma to which the candidate has been admitted or is eligible for admission, except to such extent as the Faculty Board may detennine.

(3) Notwithstanding anything hereinbefore contained, a candidate who has satisfied all the requirements of the course leading to the award of the Diploma in Aviation Science of this University may be granted standing in all semester subjects passed in that course for entry into the Bachelor of Science degree programme.

8. Withdrawal

(1) A candidate may withdraw from asubject or the course only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and

14

ORDINARY BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS

the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted pennission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:

(a) in the case of semester subjects offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the 9th week of first semester;

(b) in thecaseof any semester subject offered only in the secondsemester, the Monday ofthe9th week of second semester;

(c) in the case of two semester subjects offered jointly over the duration of two consecutive semesters, the Monday of the 3rd week of the second semester.

9. Time Requirements

(1 ) Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the requirements for an ordinary degree within eighteen semesters, or for the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) honours degree within twenty two semesters from the commencement of the course. A candidate who has been granted standing in recognition of work completed elsewhere shall be deemed to have commenced the degree course from a date to be detennined by the Dean.

(2) Upon request by a candidate, the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the qualifying period for a semester subject or the degree.

Part II - Combined Degree Course Regulations 10. A candidate may complete the requirements for the degree in conjunction with another Bachelor's degree by completing a combined course approved by the Dean or the Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.

11. Admission to a combined degree course-

(a) shall be subject to the approval of the Dean or Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.

(b) shall, except in exceptional circumstances, be after the successful completion of 48 credit points of their current degree enrolment; and

(c) shall be restricted to candidates with an average of at least Credit Grade.

12. The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree course shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately and shall be certified by the Dean or Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.

13. To qualify for admission to the two degrees, acandidate shaD satisfy the requirements for both degrees except as provided in the Schedule for combined degrees.

SECfION THREE

Part m - Exceptional Circumstances 14. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate on the Recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.

SCHEDULE I - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

1. To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science, a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a credit point score of at least 144 points.

2. The semester subjects or their equivalent presented for the degree shall consist of:

(a) at least six 100, six 200 and eight 300 level semester SUbjects chosen from those approved by the Faculty Board. For the purpose of this regulation, two 3 credit point subjects are considered to be the equivalent of a semester subject.

(b) at least two 100 level semester subjects from each of three Departments in the FaCUlty. Approved semester subjects for the purpose of this regulation shall include:

Biology 101/102, Chemistry 101/102, Geography 101/ 102, Geology 101/1 02, Mathematics 101/102 or 102/103, Physics 101/102 or 102/103, and Psychology 101/102.

(c) two 100 level, three 200 level and four 300 level semester subjects in one department of the Faculty, chosen from those offered by the Departments of Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Physics, andPsychology.

(d) not more than 96 credit points from anyone Department; and

(e) 300 level semester subjects from no more than three Departments in the University.

3. A candidate may select no more than nine semester subjects or equivalent (54 credit points) from those offered in courses leadingto other degrees of the University, with the pennission of the Dean who shall determine the classification of each semester subject at the 100, 200 or 300 level.

SCHEDULE2- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)

1. To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation), a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a credit point score of atlcast 144 points, in accordance with the following requirements:

(a) 36creditpointsfromAviation 101, 102, 104, 105, 106, 108;

(b) 30 credit points from Aviation 201, 202, 204.205,206;

(c) 24 credit points from Aviation 301, 302, 303, 304;

(d) 12 credit points from either Aviation 103 and 101 or Psychology 101 and 102; or other approved 100 level subjects;

(e) 18 credit points from Psychology 201, 202, and 203; or Geography 201, 203 and 204; or other approved 200 level SUbjects; and

ORDINARY BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS

(f) 24 credit points from Psychology 300 level, Geography 300 level or other approved 300 level subjects.

SCHEDULE 3 - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (pSYCHOLOGy)

1. TheBachelorofScience (psychology) may be conferred either as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree. For the honours degree there shall be three classes of honours: Qass I, Class IT and Class III. Class IT shall have two divisions, namely Divisionland Division II.

2. To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science (psychology), a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) level 100 to 300 semester subjects (144 credit points) approved by the Faculty Board, combined with either Psychology 401 and 402 or Psychology 403 and 404 (48 credit points) for a total credit point score of at least 192 points. Of these, 48 points shall come from subjects at the 400 level, atleast48 from subjects at the300 level, at least 36 from subjects at the 200 level, and at least 36 from subjects at the 100 level.

3. Semester subjects or their equivalent presented for the degree shall include:

(a) 12 credit points from Psychology 101 and 102;

(b) 30 credit points from Psychology 201. 202, 203, 204, 205, and 206;

(c) 24 credit points from Psychology 301, 302, 303, and 305;

(d) 48 creditpointsfrom Psychology 401 and4020r Psychology 403 and 404;

(e) at least 24 credit points from two 100 level semester subjects from each oft wo other Departments in the Faculty. Approved semester subjects forthe purposeofthisregulation shall include:

Biology 101/102, Chemistry 101/102, Geography 101/ 102, Geology 101/102, Mathematics 101/102 or 102/103, and Physics 101/102 or 1021103; and

(f) at least 24 credit points from other approved semester subjects at the 300 level.

4. Entry to Psychology 401 and 402 requires a Credit Grade averageinfour300levelsemestersubjectsinPsychologyinclUding Credit Grades in both Psychology 301 (Methodology) and Psychology 305 (Independent Project).

5. A candidate may select up to four semester subjects (24 credit points) from those offered in courses leading to other degrees of the University withthepennissionoftheDean who shall determine the c1assificationof each semester subject at the 100 or200 level.

6. The results obtained by a successful candidate shall be: in Psychology 403 and 404 - High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Tenninating Pass; in Psychology 401 and 402 - Honours Class I, 11(1), 11(2) or III.

Notes

1 The Bachelor o/Science degree with Honows in Psychology remains tM preferred pathfor those who wish to complete a four-year Psychology degree.

15

SECTION TIlREE

2. Students will not be permitted to transfer from Psychology 4031404 to Psychology4011402, although tire reverse may be possible.

3. Th£ Department of Psychology retains tM right to determine the entry requirements for Psychology 401.

SCHEDULE 4 - BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

1. To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics, a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board. for acredit point score of at least 144 points. Of these, at least 42 points shall come from subjects at the 300 level, at least 42 from subjects at the 200 level, and at least 36 from subjects at the 100 level.

2. At least 96 credit points for the degree must satisfy the following requirements. Up to 48 credit points may come from subjects offered elsewhere in the University, if approved.

3. The subjects counted towards the degree must provide:

(a) 12 credit points from Mathematics 102 and 103;

(b) 18 credit points from Mathematics 201, 203, 204, 206, 208 together with one of Mathematics 205, 207,209,210, 211;

(c) at least 18 further credit points from subjects in the 200 level of Categories A and B;

(d) 24 credit points from subjects at the 300 level of Category A; and

(e) at least 24 further credit points from subjects in Category A and the 300 level of Category B, of which up to 6 credit points may come from subjects at the 200 level Category A. if approved by the Department of Mathematics.

Lev" Category A CategoryB

200 All Mathematics 200 All ComputerScience 200

Statistics 201-204 All Physics 200

300 All Mathematics 300 All ComputerScience300

Statistics 301-304 All Physics 300

SCHEDULE 5 - COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1. Students qualified to enrol in a combined degree may apply to undertake study in one of the following degree combinations:

Science/Arts SciencejMathematics

Science/Engineering

Mathematics/Arts

Mathematics/Commerce

MathematicslEngineering

Mathematics/ECOnomics

Mathematics/Computer Science

Mathematics/Sutveying

2. Selection of the specific subject content of each combined degree will be prescribed by the Dean or Deans of each Faculty.

16

BACHELOR OF MA TIffiMATICS REGUlATIONS

Regulations Governing the Diploma in Aviation Science in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics, 1. General

These regulations prescribe the conditions and requirements relating to the Diploma in Aviation Science of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.

2. Definitions

In these Regulations and the Ust attached thereto. unless the content or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"Board of Studies" means the Board of Studies in Aviation.

"course" means a group of semester subjects selected in conformit y with the conditions prescribed for each degree~

"the Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;

"Department" means the department or departments offering a particular semester subject and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty~

"Schedule" means the Schedule to these Regulations relevant to the course in which a person is enrolled or proposing to enrol;

"semester subject" means any programme of study which aggregates to a total of 6 (six) credit points and for which aresult may be recorded. For the purpose of this definition two 3 (three) credit point subjects can be equated to one semester subject.Semester subjects shall be classified as 100 and 200 level by the Faculty Board.

3. Admission

An applicant for admission to candidature shall satisfy the requirements of the Regulations Governing Admission and Enrolment and such other additional requirements as may be . specified in the Schedule.

4. Enrolment

SECfION TIIREE

5. Prerequisites and Corequisites

(1) The Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Head of Department, may prescribe prerequisites andIorcorequisites for any semester subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board, granted afler considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a semester subject unless that candidate has satisfied any prereqUisites and has already or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any semester subject prescribed as its corequisite.

6. Semester Subject

(1) To complete a semester subject. a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field·work and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.

(2) To pass asemester subject, acandidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

(3) The results obtained by a successful candidate in asemester subject shall be: High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Terminating Pass.

7. Standing

(1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified semester subjects to a candidate. on such conditions as it may detennine after considering the recommendation of the Board of Studies, in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution.

(2) A candidate may not present for the degree subjects which have been counted previously towards a degree or diploma to which the candidate has been admitted or is eligible for admission, except to such extent as the Faculty Board may determine.

8. Withdrawal

(1)

(1) In any semester, a candidate shall enrol only in those, semester subjects approved by the Dean or the Dean's ,. (2)

A candidate may withdraw from asubject or the course only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:

(2)

(3)

nominee. , t,

Except with the approval of the Dean, given only if the I(

Dean is satisfied that the academic merit of the candidate so f. warrants, a candidate shall not enrol in more than four ~;. semester subjects or their equivalent in anyone semester. ): , A candi~te may not enro~ in an~ s~m:ster in ~y ~ combination of semester subjects which IS Incompatible W

with the requirements of the timetable for that semester. ~ i

(a) in the case of semester subjects offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the 9th week of first semester;

(b )in thecaseof any semester subject offered only in the second semester. the Monday of the 9th week of second semester;

(c) in the case of two semester subjects offered jointly over the duration of two consecutive semesters, the Monday of the 3rd week of the second semester.

DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE REGULATIONS

9. Choice of SUbjects

To qualify for a Diploma in Aviation Science. a candidate shall pass at least fourteen (14) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a minimum credit point score of 84 points, in accordance with the following requirements:

(a) 36 credit points from Aviation 101,102,104, 105,106,108;

(b) 24 credit points from Aviation 201, 202, 204, 205;

(c) 12 credit points from either Aviation 103 and 107 or Psychology 101 and 102; or other approved 100 level subjects.

(d) 12 credit points from either Aviation 203 and 206 or Psychology 201 and 202 or 203; or Geography 201 and 203; or other approved 200 level subjects.

10. Time Requirements

(1 ) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the requirements for the diploma within twelve semesters from the commencement of the course. A candidate who has been granted standing in recognition of work completed elsewhere shall be deemed to have commencedthediplomacoursefromadatetobedetennined by the Dean.

(2) Upon request by a candidate, the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the qualifying period for a semester subject or the degree.

11. Award of Diploma

The Diploma shall be awarded in two grades, namely:

(a) Diploma in Aviation Science; and

(b) in cases where a candidate's performance has reached a level determined by the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies, Diploma in Aviation Science with Merit

12. Relaxing Provision

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate on the Recommendation ofthe Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these RegUlations.

17

SECI'ION FOUR

RECOMMENDED PROGRAMMES FOR THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

DEGREE

The choice of subjects noW offered by the Faculty of Science and Mathematicshas expanded more than two-fold with lheadvent of semesterisation. In order to provide some guidance to students. each Department has provided one or more possible degree patterns which would lead to a suitable professional qualification in theirdiscipline. The patterns are not prescriptive,except in so far as they meet therequiremenls of the various degree regulations. Students may vary their selection in confOInlity with degree regulations, and prerequisite and corequisite requirements as detailed in the semester subject tables. All courses selected must aggregate to 144 credit points for a pass degree or 192 points for a four year Bachelor of Science (psychology) degree.

All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up to four letters representing the department offering the subject, followed by three numbers. the first of which signifies the level (lOO, 200, 300, 400) at which the subject is being presented.

Thefollowingprogrammeshavebeensetoutasrecommendations

for inclusion in the first, second and third calendar years of a pass degree. Some programmes include a fourth year for the Honours Degree which is generally a postgraduate degree.

Biological Sciences Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to develop capacities in a broad range of the basic sciences, as well as in the Biological Sciences.

Additionally, students' interests can changeduring their University training, and it is advisable to undertake a first-year programme which could lead in many directions, depending upon individual experiences and interests developed during the first year at University. Students intending to major in Biology should consider

18

Programme A. Those wishing to major in Biology and another discipline might elect to complete Programmes B or C.

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES - PROGRAMME A

Year 1

BIOLIOI, BIOLI02, CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 and either; MA THSIOI/l02 or MA THSI 02/103, plus 2 other subjects from ; Level 100. (For Environmental Biology select GEOG101 and

GEOOI02)

Years 2 &3

The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects which should be studied to enable students to develop expertise in particular specialised areas. The indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studied. Additional subjects in Biological Sciences or other disciplines must be taken to satisfy subject requirements for the degree. It should be noted that not all 300 level Biological Science subjects will be offered in the one year. Students wishing to do specific subjects should check when they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year.

Year 4

BIOlAOI and B10lA02

Area of Biology

Animal Physiology

Animal Science

Biochemistry

BlologlcaJ Sciences Subject

BIOL201, 202 204, 205, 301, 302, 305,308

BIOL2Ol, 202, 203, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,308

BIOL201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302, 305,307,309

SEcnONFOUR

Cell & Molecular Biology BIOL201, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307, 309

Developmental Biology B10L202, 204, 205, 206, 301, 302, 304,307,308

Environmental Biology BIOL202, 203, 206,302, 303, 304, 306

Genetics BIOL201, 203, 204, 205, 301, 305, 306,307,309

Immunology B10L201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 305, 308,309

Molecular Biology BIOL201, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307, 309

Plant Physiology BIOL204, 205, 206, 303, 304, 307

Plant Molecular Biology B10L204, 205, 206, 303, 304,307, 309

ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY -PROGRAMMEB

Year 1

BIOLIOI,BIOLI02,GEOGI01,GEOOI02plus4othersemester subjects.

Year 2

BIOL202, BIOL203, B10L206, GEOG201, GEOG203, GEOO204 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry, Geography, Mathematics or Geology.

Year 3

BI0L303, BI0L306 plus 2 other Biology and 4 Physical Geography semester subjects

BIOLOGY AND CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME C

Year 1 BIOLlO1,B10Ll02, CHEMlOl, CHEMI02plus4other semester subjects.

Year 2 BIOL201, BIOL204, BIOL205, CHEM201, CHEM203, CHEM206 plus 2 other semester subjects

Year 3 BIOL301, BI0L305, BIOL307, BIOL309, CHEM301, CHEM306plus2othersemestersubjectsfromBiology,Chemistry or one other discipline.

Chemistry Chemistry is a science concerned primarily with matter and the changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry is important not onlyinitselfbut also as a background to many other sciences.

'!be study of Chemistry is open to all students who have qualified for admission into the University. However, those who have not studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some self­preParation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Details on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading are provided under the appropriate Level 1 00 subjectdescriptions.

The Chemistry Department offers courses over the whole range of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the

BACHELOR OF SCmNCE PROGRAMMES

traditional areas of analytical, inorganic and physical chemistry together with some more diverse applied subjects.

Theflexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to major in Chemistry on a broad level or to specialise in certain areas of the subject and to combine these with relevant subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested primarily in Physical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students majoringin other Departments may choose companion Chemistry subjects relevant to their interests. Thus some coursesin Analytical and Inorganic Chemistry would be useful to Geology majors; OrganicChemistry subjectswouldberelevantforBiology majors; Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses in Physical Chemistry, etc.

Students intending to do a major in Chemistry would have to complete programme A which is regarded as a minimum requirement for a thorough grounding in the subject. Students wishing to devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double major as in Programme B where they can complete up to two-thirds of their degree programme in this one discipline. Many subject combinations in between these two programmes are possible. Thus for example, a student may choose six 3()() Level subjects in Chemistry and two from another Department, etc.

Chemistry is a recognised profession which is served by a professional body, the Royal Australian Chemical Institute (R. A. C.I.). Many employment opportunities for chemists require membership of this organization. Graduates seeking membership must have completed at least the subjects listed in Programme A.

Following either of these programmes or combinations thereof may lead to postgraduate study at the Honours standard (Level 4(0), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly recommends the Honours Degree to students both for the additional experience it provides and for its enhancement of employment opportunities and professional standing. Honours studentsdevote most of their time to an independent research project together with some fonnal course work. The project is selected in an area of interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. This degree is also the nonnal entry requirement to research higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department.

CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME A

Year 1

CHEMIOI and CHEMI 02; either MATHlOl/1 02 or MATHI 02/ 103, and four other subjects from Level 100

Year 2

CHEM20l, CHEM202, CHEM203, CHEM204, plus four other subjects from Level 200

Year 3

Choose at least four subjects from CHEM301, CHEM302, CHEM303, CHEM304, CHEM305, CHEM306, CHEM307, CHEM308, and up to four other subjects from Level 300

Year 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402 19

SECfrON FOUR

CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME B

Year 1

CHEMIOI andCHEMI02; either MA THIOI/1 020r MATHlO2/ 103; and four other subjects from Level 100

Year 2

CHEM20I, CHEM202, CHEM203, CHEM204, CHEM205 and CHEM206, and two other subjects from Level 200

Year 3

CHEM30l, CHEM302, CHEM303, CHEM304, CHEM305, CHEM306, CHEM307, CHEM308

Year 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402

Geography

Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis to the interactions among the physical, economic and social elements of the environment. Modem Geography may be divided into studies in Human Geography (Programme A) and Physical Geography (Programme B), but students may advantageously combine units from Human and Physical Geography (Programme C).

Human Geography (Programme A) analyses the factors and processes that govern the distribution of people and theireconomic and social activities. Changes in distribution patterns and activities through time require study of past processes and prediction for the future from analysis of present trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially in areas that involve planning, social and economic analysis. ECONI01, ECONI02, HISTlO!, H1STl02, PHILlO!, SOCIO! and SOCI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.

Physical Geography (Programme B) analyses the factors and processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the physical environment. Emphasis is placed on study ofthe processes that develop landfonns and soils on the meteorological processes that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Employment opportunities are good both in the private and public sector which is currentI y demanding graduates with a good understanding of environmental issues and their management. B10LlOI, BIOLl02, GEOLlO!, GEOLl02, PHYSIOI and PHYSI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.

Geography (Programme C) combines units from Human Geography and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other subjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and Science and Mathematics. The programme can be taken to Major level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201, GEOG202, GEOO301 and GEOG302, but for Honours a Methods stream (GEOO201 plus GEOG301 or GEOG202 plus GEOG302) is necessary. Employment opportunities are good but diverse. Suitable complementary subjects at the 100 level should be chosen from Arts, Economics and Science according to second year unit preferences in Geography (see Programmes A and B).

20

BACHELOROFSCrnNCEPROG~ S~E~CT~IO~N~FO~UR~ ____________________________________________ ~B~A~C~HEL~OQR~O~F~S~C~rn~N~C~E~P~R~~~~~~

MAJOR IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME A Geology

Year 1

GEOOI01 and GEOGI02. Choose six other subjects from Level 100. ECONIOI, ECONI02, HISTlOI, HISTl02, PHILIOI, SOC! 01 and SOCI 02 recommended

Year 2

GEOG201, GEOG203 and GEOG204. Choose five other subjects from Level 200

Year 3

GE0030I,GEOG303,GEOG304,andGEOG305.Choosefour other subjects from Level 300

Year 4

GE00401 and GEOG402.

MAJOR IN PHysrCALGEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME B

Year 1

Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the course is outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated study of the major processes, hence field,1aboratQry and lecture work are intertwined.

Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, especially if interests are in palaeontology and evolution (biological sciences), sutficial processes (geography), geophysics (Physics and mathematics), geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy and petrology (chemistry).

Employment for geologists is available in the minerals, petroleum, coal, environmental and engineering,industries. A professional degree(atleastGEOL305, GE0L306)isrequiredformembership to the professional body. Employers and the Department very strongly recommend the honours degree (GEOL401/GE0L402) which allows professional research through some independent investigation.

GEOO101 and GEOG1 02. Choose six other subjects from Level' lOO.B10LlOI,B10Ll02,GEOLlOI,GEOLl02,PHYSI0Iand, Mathematics

PHYS102 recommended The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all Year 2 levels. For the purposes of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree,

GEOG202, GEOG205 and GEOG206. ChoosefiveothersubjeclS ~ the Bachelor of Science degree, the Bachelor of Arts degree and from Level 200 . the Bachelor of Engineering degree certain combinations are

) advised by the appropriate Faculty. Students wishing to obtain professional qualifications in mathematics should enrol in the BachelorofMathematics degree programme where it is possible to fill their second and third years completely with mathematics.

Year 3

GE00302, GE00306, GEOG307 and GE00308. Choose four; other subjects from Level 300 t , Year 4 i

GE00401 and GEOG402 I MAJOR IN GEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME C I Year 1 i GEOOI0l and GEOG102. Choose six other subjects from LeVelJ 100 '

Year 2

ChooseTHREEsubjectsfromGEOG201,GEOG202,GEOG203, GE00204, GE00205, GEOG206

Choose five other subjects from Level 200

Year 3*

Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG301, GEOG302, GEOG303, GE00304, GEOG305, GEOG306, GEOG307, GEOG308

Choose four other subjects from Level 300

Year 4

GEOG401 and GEOG402

*NOTE: Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Level 200 subjects chosen.

Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete strand of study which is considered to be appropriate and sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the discipline as a component of their degree. The programme suggested for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements for a major in mathematics.

MATHEMATICS_ BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS DEGREE

1be Bachelor of Mathematics degree enables a student to complete afuU course in Mathematics, orto combine a Mathematics major with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate discipline as set out in the Regulations. Note thatfortheBachelor of Mathematics degree, rather more Mathematics is required at the 200 level, thus providing a base for a double major in Mathematics, or a majorin Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or Computer Science.

Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of Schedule 4 of the Bachelor DegreeRegulations in this handbook In total, at least 96 credit points must include the subjects in the follOwing list. The remaining 48 points for the ordinary degree may include subjects offered elsewhere in the University.

1be prescribed components of the degree include:

Year 1

MA THl02 and MATHI03 (12 credit points)

Year 2

MATH201,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH208and one of MATH205, MATH207, MATH209, MATH210 or MATH211 (18 credit points); and a further 18 credit points from MATH200, STA T2OO, COMP200 and/or PHYS200. (For 1990 only MATH205 replaces MATH204 in the above list. Consult with Department)

Year 3

MA TH300 and/or STA 1'300 (24 credit points); plus afurther 24 credit points from MATH300, STA1'300, C0MP300 and/or PHYS300

Year 4

MATH401 and MATH402

MATHEMATICS-BACHELOR OFSCIENCE DEGREE

This is a course of study which consists of at least the follOwing semester subjects.

Year 1 MA THI 02, MA THI03 and 6 other subjects from Level 100

Year 2 MATH20I, MATH203, MATH204, MATH206, MATH208 and one chosen from MATH205, MATH207, MATH209, MATH210, or MATH211 plus 5 five other subjects from Level 200

Year 3 Any four semester subjects from Mathematics I..eveI300, chosen with advice from the Department

Physics

For employment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An honours degree in Physics or combined Physics/Mathematics would be preferred.

Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary ~nstitutions and judges them in terms of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist, but a degree is usually necessary for government and indUStry recognition and status as a professional physicist

It is advisable for intending physicists to include ample mathematics in their course and pursue a related science such as Chemistry or Geology to Level 200 subjects if at all possible.

For aPhysics major in the Bachelorof Science degree atleast the follOwing semester subject structure is necessary:

21

SECTION FOUR

Year 1

PHYSI02, PHYSI03', MATIlI02 and MATHI03 Choose four other subjects from Level 100, preferably leading to Level 200 in at least one other science discipline. (*Students achievingacreditlevelorbetterinPHYSIOl andPHYSI02may beadmitted to Level200in Physics with the approval ofthe Head of Department)

Year 2

PHYS201 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202, PHYS203 or PHYS204; and MATHZOI (advisory)

Year 3

PHYS301. PHYS302 and two subjects chosen from PHYS303. PHYS304 or PHYS305

Year 4

PHYS401.PHYS402. Note that the Level 300 subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree

Psychology As a discipline, Psychology is open to all students who gain admission to the University. Psychology is abroad discipline and it is difficult to stale preparatory subjects that should be studied together with Psychology.

Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament which will require anyone wishing to practise as a Psychologist to have a minimum of four years training. In the Science and Mathematics Faculty, Psychology can be taken either as aBScor aBSc(psychology)degree. TheBScdegreeis athree year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year and the BSc (psychology) degree is a four year degree. The programmes within these two degrees are set out below.

The Department's aim is to produce "psychologists who should by virtue of their training be able to playa unique role such as critically examining research and scholarly literature in the field of psychology, contributing to empirical research in psychology, administering and interpreting psychological tests and measurement procedures and prescribing, implementing and evaluating forms of psychological intexvention andremediation" .

Entry into the Honours subjects is based on the completion of at least five level 200 subjects in Psychology and a credit leVel average in four 300 level subjects including credit level in Advanced Foundations for Psychology (psYC301) and the Independent Project (psYC302).

The Department currently offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master of Psychology (Clinical) degree has an Honours entry requirement while the Master of Psychology (Educational) has a major in Psychology as an entry requirement, a teaching qualification and in addition, two years teaching (or otherrelevant) experience. The Honours degree is the nonnal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science and Doctorof Philosophy.

22

BACHELOROFSCffiNCEPROGRAMMES ~SE~CT~IO~N~FO~UR~ ____________________________________________ ~B~A~CHE~~L~O~R~O~F~S~C~ffi~N~C~E~P~R~OG~RAM~~MES~

BSC WITH A PSYCHOLOGY MAJOR

Year 1

PSYCI01, PSYCI02 plus 6 other semester subjects at level 100

Year 2

PSYC20I, PSYC202, PSYCZ03 plus other subjects at the 200 level, some of which may also be taken in Psychology

Year 3

PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304 plus at least one other chosen from PSYC302, PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307 or PSYC308, and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level

BSC HONOURS DEGREE IN PSYCHOLOGY

Year 1

PSYCI 01, PSYCI02, plus 6 other subjects from level 1 00

Year 2 PSYC20l, PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206, plus 2 other 200 level subjects

Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC302, PSYC303, PSYC304 and other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department

Year 4

PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in the above six 200 level subjects as well as a credit average at the 300 level, including at least a credit level pass in PSYC301 and PSYC302

BSC(pSYCHOWGY)AWARDEDATHONOURSLEVEL

Years 1 to 2

As for Psychology Honours above

Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC302, PSYC303, PSYC304 and other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list, including those offered by the Psychology Department

Year 4

PSYC401 and PSYC402

Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in the above six 200 level subjects as well as a credit average at the 300 level, including at least acredit level pass in PSYCH301 and PSYC302

BSC (pSYCHOLOGy) - DEGREE

Years 1 to 2

As for Psychology Honours above

Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC303, PSYC304 and at least one other 300 level Psychology subject selected from the scheduled list, including those offered by the Psychology Department

Year 4

PSYC403 and PSYC404

Statistics Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into information. This involves collecting, presenting and analysing data, interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions or make decisions. The principles of Statistics are based on ideas from the philosophy of science and mathematics and, more recently, insights from cognitive science and developments in computing. Computers play an essential role in Statistics for data management and analysis. Statistics is a practical subject. It involves designing experimental plans and sampling procedures, calculating how many subjects or objects should be studied and determining how the measurements should be made in order to obtain data which is reliable, accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysis, based on mathematics including probability theory, are used to decide what conclUsions can validly be drawn from the data

The Statistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level through to the Honours level as well as research degrees.

For a major in Statistics a student should take the following subjects:

Year 1

STATIOI and MATHI020r MATHI02andMATHI03. Choose other subjects worth 36 credit points from Levell 00

Year 2

STAT20I, STATZ02, STAT203, and STAT204. Choose other subjects worth 30 credit points from Level 200

Year 3

STATIOI, STATI02, STATI03, STATI04. Choose other subjects worth 24 credit points from Level 300

Year 4

STAT401 andSTAT402

23

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN BACHELOR DEGREE SCHEDULES 1 TO 4

Number Subject Points When WW

BIOWGICAL SCIENCES

BIOL!OI Plant & Animal Biology

BIOLl02 Cell Biology, Genetics

& Evolution

BIOL20l Biochemistry

BIOL202 Animal Physiology

BIOL203 population Dynamics

BlOL204 Cell & Molecular

Biology

BIOL205 Molecular Genetics

BIOL206 Plant Physiology

BI0L30l Cell Processes

BI0L302 Reproductive Physiology

BI0L303 Environmental Plant

Physiology

BI0L304 Whole Plant

Development

BI0L305 Immunology

BI0L306 Ecology & Evolution

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

BI0L307 Molecular Biology of 6 Plant Development

BI0L308 Mammalian Development 6

BI0L309 Molecular Biology 6

F = Full Year, S1 = Semester 1; S2 = Semester 2

24

SI

S2

SI

SI

SI

S2

S2

S2

SI

SI

SI

SI

S2

S2

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

S2 6

S2 6

Not in 6

1990

Prerequisites

1990 1991

Biology I

Biology I

Biology I

Biology I

Biology I

Biology I

Biology ITA

mITB

incl. 712103

Biochemistry

Biology ITA

or lIB

Biology ITA

or lIB Biology ITA

or lIB Biology ITA

or lIB Biology ITA

or lIB

Biology ITA

or lIB

Biology ITA

orITB

Biology lIA

or lIB

BIOL!OI

BIOLl02

BlOLlOI

BlOLl02

B10LlOI

B10Ll02

BIOLIOI

BIOLl02

BIOLIOI

BIOLl02

BlOLlOI

BIOLl02

BlOL201 &

oneBIOLZOO

TwoBIOL200

TwoBIOL200

Two BlOL200

TwoBIOLZOO

BlOL203 &

oneBIOL200

TwoBIOL200

incl. one of

BIOL20lor

BIOL204 or

BIOL205 TwoBIOL200

incl. one of

BIOL20lor

BIOL204

TwoBIOL200

incl. one of

BIOL20lor

BIOL205

Corequisites

1990

SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Number Subject

CHEMISTRY

CHEM!OI Chemistry!Ol

CHEMI02 Chemistry 102

CHEM20l Analytical Chemistry

CHEM202 Inorganic Chemistry

CHEM203 Organic Chemistry

CHEM204 Physical Chemistry

CHEM205 Applied Chemistry 205

CHEM206 Applied Chemistry 206

CHEM301 Instrument Analysis &

Chromatography

CHEM302 Trace Analysis &

Chemometrics

CHEM303 Coordination & Organo·

metallic Chemistry

CHEM304 Bioinorganic &

Cluster Chemistry

CHEM305 Mechanistic &

Synthetic Organic

Chemistry

CHEM306 Heterocyclic &

Biological Organic

Chemistry

CHEM307 Electrodics & Quantum

Chemistry

CHEM308 Photoelectron

Spectroscopy &

Electrochemical Solar

Energy Conversion

GEOGRAPHY

GBOO101 Introduction to

Physical Geography

GEOO102 Introduction to Human

Geography

GEOG201 Methods in Physical

Gecgraphy

GEOO202 Methods in Human

Geography

GEOO203 Biogeography and

Climatology

GEOO204 Geomorphology of

Australia

GEOO205 Contemporary Australia

& East Asia

Points

6

6

6

6

6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

When

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI

S2

S2

SI

SI

HIW

6

6

6

6

6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Prerequisites

1990 1991

CHEMIOI

Chemistry I

Chemistry I

Chemistry I

Chemistry I

Chemistry I

Chemistry I

Chemistry ITA

Chemistry

ITA and

Maths I or IS

Chemistry ITA

Chemistry ITA

Chemistry IIA

Chemistry lIA

Chemistry ITA

& Maths I or IS

Chemistry ITA

& Maths I or IS

See'

See'

Geography I

Geography I

Geography I

Geography I

Geography

CHEMIOI

CHEMI02

CHEMI02

CHEMI02

CHEMI02

CHEM102

CHEMI02

CHEM201

CHEM201

MATHl02

CHEM202

CHEM202

CHEM203

CHEM203

CHEM204

MATHI02

CHEM204

MATHI02

See'

See'

GEOGIOI

GEOGI02

GEOGIOI

GEOGIOI

GEOGI02

Corequisites

1990

I Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites/or a major study in Geography. and/or admission to Geography Honours GEOG401.

25

SECfION FOUR

Number Subject Points When H/W

GEOO206 Socio-Economic

Geography

GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography

GEOO302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography

GEOG303 Geography of Aboriginal

Australia

GEOO304 The Biosphere &

Conservation

6

6

6

6

6

GEOO305 Climatic Problems 6 GEOG306 Geography of Australia: 6

An Historical Perspective

GEOG301 The Hydrosphere 6 GEOG308 Basic Needs & Pa11erns 6

of Inequality

GEOLOGY GEOLlOl The Environment GEOLl 02 Earth Materials

GEOL201 Mineralogy

GEOL202 Petrology

GEOL203 Palaeoenvironments

GEOL204 Structural & Resource

Geology

GEOL205 Geology Field

Course 205

GEOL206 Geology Field

Course 206

GEOL207 Geology Field

Course 207

GEOLJOI Earth Processes 1

GE01.302 Earth Processes 2

GEOLJ03 Earth Malerials 1

GE01.304 Earth Materials 2

GE01.305 Earth Resources

GEOLJ06 Applied Geology

26

6

6 6

3 6

3

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

12

12

S2

S2

S2

Sl

S2

Sl

Sl

S2

Sl

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Sl,S2 6 S2 6 SI 6

Sl 3

S2 6

S2 3

Sl 3

(+Vac)

Sl 3

(+Vac)

S2 3

(+Vac)

Sl 6

S2 6 Sl 6

S2 6

Sl 12

S2 12

· APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Prerequisites

1990 1991

Corequisites

1990

Geography I

Geography IIB

Geography IlA

Geography I

Geography IIB Geography IlA

Geography I

Geography IIA

GEOL101

Geology I

Geology I

Geology! or

GEOLl02

GEOL201

GEOL202

Geology I

Geology I

Geology I &

Geology IIA

GEOLJOI

Geology IIA

Geology IIA

Geology IlA

GeologyIIA

GEOGI02

GEOGIOI

GEOG201

GEOGI02

GEOG202

GEOGI02

GEOG203

GEOG102

GEOGIOI

GEOG206

Advisory

GEOLlOl

GEOLl02

GEOLl02

GEOLl02

GEOG206

Advisory

GEOLIOI

GEOL202

GEOL201

GEOL201 GEOL203

GEOL202

GEOLl02

GEOLl02

GEOLI 02 & GEOL204

GEOL206

Advisory GEOL2OI, 202

GEOL203, 204 &

(I of GEOL205,

GEOL206, 207)

GEOLJOI

GEOL2OI, 202

GEOL203, 204 &

(I of GEOL205,

GEOL206,207)

GEOL2OI, 202

&GEOL203

GEOL2OI, 202

GEOL203,204

GEOL20l,202

GEOL203,204

GEOLJOI

GEOLJ03

GEOLJOI

GEOLJ03

SECfION FOUR

Number Subject

MATHEMATICS

MATHI01 Mathematics 101

MA TH102 Mathematics 102

MATHI03 Mathematics 103

MA THl99 Transition Mathematics3

MA TH20l Multivariable Calculus

MA TH202 Partial Differential Equationsl

MATH203 Ordinary Differential

Equations 1

MATH204 Real Analysis

MATH205 Analysis of Metric

Spaces

MATH206 Complex Analysis 1

MA TH207 Complex Analysis 2

MA TH208 linear Algebra 1

MATH209 Linear Algebra 2

MATH210 Geometry I

MA TH211 Group Theory

MATH212 Discrete Mathematics

MA TH2l3 Mathematical

Modelling

Points When WW

6

6

6

o 3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

SI 6

SI,S2 6

S2 6 F 3 SI 2

S2 2

S2 2

Nolin 2

1990

SI 2

SI 2

Not in 2 1990

S2 2 1990

Not 2 in 1990

Not 2

in 1990

SI 2

SI 2

S2 2

APPROVED SUBIEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Prerequisites

1990 1991

MATH101

or see2

MATH102

Maths IS'

Malhs I

MATH201

Maths I

Mathsl

Maths I

Maths I

Maths I

Maths I

Maths I

MATH101

or see2

MATHl02

Maths IS' MATH!02&

MATHI03 or

MATH101 &

MATHl02

MATHl02&

MATHI03 or

MATH101 &

MATH102

MATH102 &

MATHl030r

MATH101 &

MATH102

MATHI02

&MATHI03

MATH204

MATH102

MATH103

MATH206

MATH102&

MATH1030r

(MATHI01 &

MATH102&

CompScI)

MATHI02

MATHl03

MATH208

MATH208

MATH102

MATHI03

MATHl02&

MATHI03 or (MATHlOl &

MATHl02&

CompScl)

MATHI02&

MATHl03

Corequisites

1990

MATH203

MATH201

:I AdVisory entry requirement _ HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 1101150 (or must have passed MATH10l)

3 MathemaHcs 102 (pre-1990) is a separate conversion subject which must 1W1 be confused with MATH 102 semester subject

,

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES I SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Number Subject Points When row Prerequisites

1990

MATH214 Mechanics 3 S2 2 Maths I

MATH215 Operations Research 3 SI 2 Maths I

MATH216 Numerical Analysis 3 S2 2 Maths I

MA TH301 Logic & Set Theory 6 SI 3 MathsIIA

MA TH302 General Tensors & 6 SI 3 Topic CO

Relativity

MATH303 Variational. Methods & 6 SI 3 Topic CO

Integral Equations

MATH304 Ordinary Differential 6 SI 3 Topics CO

Equations 2 &D

MATH305 Partial Differential 6 S2 3 Topic CO

Equations 2

MATH306 Ruid Mechanics 6 S2 3 Topics CO

&B

MATH307 Quantum & Statistical 6 S2 3 Topic CO

Mechanics

MA TH308 Geometry 2 6 Not 3 TopicD

in 1990

MATH309 Combinatorics 6 SI 3 TopicD

MATH310 Functional Analysis 6 SI 3 Topics B,D

CO,K,L

MATH311 Measure Theory & 6 Not 3 TopicL

Integration in 1990

4 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATH204

28

I Corequisites I Number Subject

1991 1990 Points When HIW Prerequisites

I Corequisites

MATHI02 MATHW3 1990 1991 1990 I MATH312 Algebra 6 S2 3 Topics D, K

MATHlO3 MATH208&

MATH102& MATHlO3

I (MATH2100r

MATHlO30r (in 1991) MATH21J)

, (MATHIOI & ! MATH313 Numerical Analysis 6 MATHl02&

SI 3 Topics CO,D MATHWI

CompScI) (Theory) MATHW3

MATHl02& MATHI03 MATHW4'

MATHI03 or (in 1991) MATHW8

(MATHIOI & MATH314 Optimization 6 MATHI02&

S2 3 Topics CO, L MATHWI MATH205

CompScJ) MATH2044 or MATH315 Mathematical Biology MATH2100r

6 S2 3 Topics CO, A MATH201

MATHW3 MATH21J

MATH213 MATHWI & MATH316 Industrial Modelling MATHW9

6 S2 3 Topics CO, MATH201 A,F MATHW2

(in 1992) MATH203

MATHWI MATH213

MATH203 MATH216

MATH2044

MATHWI MA TH317 Number Theory MATHW3

6 Not 3 Topic D or MATHlO2 in 1990 K MATHI03

MATH204'

MATHW8 4 Studenls who have passed Mathematics I in. 1989 or before do not need MATH204

MATH20J

MATH202 Not all MATH300 semester subjects will be offered each ear·· . consult the Department of Mathematics. y , some WIll be offered m alternate years either at the 300 or 400 level;

MATH204' The ~~ester timetabling of Mathematics 300 subjects is subject to change. MATHWI MATH207

MATH203 (in 1991) ~T~~8~~:;;-ents will apply to prerequisites in 1991 for students who passed Mathematics I in 1989 and MATH205 and

MATHW4'

MATH206

MATHWI

MATH203

MATH206

MATH210

MATH211

MATH208

MATH201

MATHW5

MATHW4'

MATHW5

MATH206

29

,I,

~' .. ' .. ., '

,

Ii

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES "SE~CTI~O~N~FO~UR~ ______________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Number Subject Points When WW

PHYSICS PHY5IOI Physics 101

PHY5102 Physics 102

PHY5103 Physics 103

6

6

6

PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & 6

Electromagnetism

PHYS202 Mechanics & Thennal 6

Physics PHYS203 Solid State & Atomic 6

Physics PHYS204 Electronics & 6

Instrumentation

PHYS301 Mathematical Methods & 6 Quantum Mechanics

PHYS302 Electromagnetism & 6 Electronics

PHYS303 Atomic. Molecular & 6 Solid State Physics

PHYS304 Statistical Physics &

Relativity

PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &

Advanced Electro­

magnetism

6

6

51 51,52

52

51

51

S2

S2

51

SI

52

52

S2

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Prerequisites

1990 1991

5ee' See6 or

PHY5101 PHYSI02 or Physics ill

Physics IN MathsP

Physics IA

Maths I' Physics IA Maths It

Physics IA

arm and Maths lorIS

Physics II Maths II9

Physics n Maths !I9

PHY5301

Physics n Maths II9

PHYS302

See'

See' or PHY5101

PHYSI02

or Physics m

MATH103

PHY5103

MATHl02

PHYSI03

PHYS201

MATHl02

PHYSI02

PHY5201

MATH201

MATH203

PHYS201

MATH201

PHY5203

PHYS301

PHY5202

MATH201

PHYS302

Corequisites

1990

MATH201

Advisory

j Advisory entry requirement _ HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a performance in the lOp 30% of candidature.

6 Advisory entry requirement _ HSC 3 unit Matlwmatics with a mark of at least 110/150 and Physics 2 unit or Science 4 unit with

performance in tlw top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

7 Students achieving a credit level or better in Physics IB may be admitted with approval 0/11u! Head of Department.

, Malhs I may be replaced by Matlwmatics IS plus conversion subject Matlwmatics 102 (pre-1990).

P Mathematics II must have included Topics CO, B and one of Topics D or F.

INSTITUTE OF AVIATION A VIA301 Advanced Aviation

Engineering &

Structures

A VIA302 Advanced Aircraft Operations &

Meteorology

A VIA303 Aviation Engineering &

Supersonic Aerodynamics

A VIA304 Advanced Navigation &

Meteorology

30

6

6

6

6

SI 6 DipAvSc

SI 6 DipAvSc

S2 6 DipAvSc

S2 6 DipAvSc

DipAvSc

incl.A VIA205

DipAvSc

incl. A VIA201

DipAvSc

incl.AVIA204

DipAvSc

and AVIA302

Number Subject Points When WW

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYCI01 Psychology 6 Introduction I

PSYC102 Psychology 6

Introduction 2

PSYC201 Foundations for 6 Psychology

PSYCZ02 Basic Processes 6

PSYC203 Developmental & Social 6 Processes

PSYC204 Individual Processes 6

PSYC205 Applied Topics in 6 Psychology 1

PSYC206 Applied Topics in 6 Psychology 2

PSYC301 Advanced Foundations 6

for Psychology

PSYC302 Independent Project 6

PSYC303 Advanced Basic 6 Processes I

PSYC304 Advanced Basic

Processes 2

PSYC305 Individual Processes

PSYC306 Advanced Social

Processes

PSYC307 Advanced Applied

Topics in Psychology 1

PSYC308 Advanced Applied

Topics in Psychology 2

PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401

PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402

PSYC403 Psychology 403

PSYC404 Psychology 404

6

6

6

6

6

24

24

16

32

SI

S2

SI

SI

SI

S2

52

S2

51

F

SI

S2

S2

51

S2

52

F F

F

F

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

Prerequisites 1990 1991

PSYC101

Psych.!

Psych.!

Psych.!

Psych.I

Psych.!

Psych.!

Psych.IIA

PsychlIA

Psych.ITA

Psych.ITA

Psych.IIA

&IlB

Psych.IIA &IlB

Psyc.IIA

&IlB

Psych,ITA

&Iffi

See Dept"

PSYC401

See Dept. ll

PSYC403

PSYC101

PSYCI02

PSYCI02

PSYC102

PSYCI02

PSYC102

PSYCZOI,202

&PSYC203

PSYCZOI, 202

&PSYC203

PSYCZ01,202

&PSYC203

PSYCZOI

PSYCZOI

PSYCZOI,202,

PSYCZ03,204

&PSYC205

PSYCZOI,202,

PSYCZ03,204,

PSYCZ05 & 206

PSYCZOI,202,

PSYCZ03,204,

PSYCZ05 & 206

PSYCZOI, 202,

PSYCZ03,204,

PSYCZ05 & 206 See DeptH

PSYC401

See Dept.1l

PSYC403

Corequisites 1990

PSYCZ01,203

PSYCZOI, 202

PSYCZ01,202

&PSYC203 PSYCZOI, 202

&PSYC203

PSYC301

PSYC301

PSYC301

PSYC30I,

PSYC303

&PSYC304

PSYC30I,

PSYC303

&PSYC304

PSYC301,

PSYC303

&PSYC304

PSYC30I,

PSYC303

PSYC304

JJ Entry ~o PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor o/Science (Psychology) degree requires a Credit or better average in appropnate Part III (pre-1990) or 300 level subjects.

31

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

LIST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites

1990 1991 1990

COMPUTER SCIENCE

COMPIOI Computer Science 1 12 F 6 (Enuy quota)

COMP201 Advanced Data Structures· 3 SI 3 COMP101 or 102 MATH212

COMP202 Computer Architecture* 3 S2 3 COMP203

COMP203 Assembly Language· 3 SI 3 COMPIOI or 102

COMP204 Programming Language 3 S2 3 COMP205

semantics*

COMP205 Programming in C· 3 SI 3 COMP101 or 102

COMP206 Theory of Computation'" 3 S2 3 MATH212

COMP241 Cognitive Science 6 F 4

COMP301 Compiler Design** 6 SI 3 COMP20I,203, COMP204, & 206

COMP302 Artificial Intelligence"'''' 6 S2 2 COMP101 or 102

COMP303 Computer Networks·'" 6 SI 2 COMP202

COMP304 Database Design·'" 6 S2 2 COMP201

COMP305 Design and Analysis of 6 COMP206 SI 2

Algorithms·'"

COMP306 Computer Graphics·· 6 S2 2 COMP20I,205,

MA TH208 & 216

COMP307 Software Engineering 6 F 2 COMP201

Principles l~"'*

COMP308 Operating Systems"'· 6 S2 2 COMP20I, 202

.Candidates wlw have completed Computer Science I meet the prerequisites/or COMP200 Level subjects . •• Candidates wlw have completed Computer Science II and Mathematics IICS meet the prerequisites/or all COMP300 Level

subjects. 14 COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion 0/ a Project report in Semester 2.

INFORMATION SCIENCE INF0101 Introduction to

Infonnation Systems

STATISTICS

6

STATI01 Introductory Statistics 6

STA 1'201 Mathematical. Statistics 6

STAT202 Regression Analysis 6

SI

S2

SI

S2

SI S2

SI

5

5

4

4

2 2

2

Maths I MATHI03 or

(STATIO! &

MATHl02)

STAT201 STAT2010r

(STATIO! &

MATHI02)

Maths I orIS MATHl02

STAT201 STAT20lor

(STATIO! &

MATHl02)

Maths I MATHI02

SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES

Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites 1990 1991 1990

STATIOI Statistical Inference 6 SI 3 Statistics II STAT201

STAT202

MATH201 STATI02 Study Design 6 SI 3 Statistics n STAT201

STAT202 STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 6 S2 3 Statistical STATIO!

Werence STATI04 Time Series Analysis 6 S2 3 Statistical STATIO I

Werence

LIST OF EXTRANEOUS SUBJECTS MATIJEMATICS EDUCATION EDUC211 Mathematics 6 S2 2 See Subject

Education 211 Description EDUC212 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject

Education 212 in 1990 Description EDUC311 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject

Education 311 in 1990 Description EDUC312 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject

Education 312 in 1990 Description

33

II

SECfIONFOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR THE DWLOMA IN AVUlTION SCmNCE S~E~C~T~I~O~N~F1~VE~ ____________________________________________________________________ __

LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE S b· oct Points When WW Prerequisites

Number U J 1990

AVlAI01 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6

Science

AVlAI02 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6

Engineering

AVlA103 Introductory Human 6 SI 6

Factors in Aviation

AVlAI04 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6

Management AVlAIOI

AVlAIOS Aviation Science 6 S2 6

AVlA106 Aviation Engineering 6 S2 6 AVlA102

AVlAI07 Aviation Psychology & 6 S2 6 AVlAI03

Medicine

AVlAI08 Aviation Management 6 S2 6 AVlAI04

AVlA201 Aviation Meteorology, 6 SI 6 AVlAI05

Navigation & Instruments AVlAI06

AVlA202 Principles of Flight, & 6 SI 6

Jet Aircraft Perfonnance

AVlA203 Human Factors in Aviation 6 SI 6 AVlAI07

AVlA204 Meteorology & High Speed 6 S2 6 AVlA201

High Altitude Navigation

AVlA205 Aerodynamics, Engines & 6 S2 6 AVlA202

Aircraft Systems AVlA203

AVlA206 Aviation Instruction 6 S2 6

34

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Subject outlines and reading lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in this Handbook.

l.(a) Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed before a qndidate emols in a particular subject.

(b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it refers to a pass in the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will be given on the assumption that a pass has been achieved at the level indicated. '

(c) Preparatory subjects are those which candidates are strongly advised to have completed before enrolling in the subject for which the preparatory subject is recommended.

2 Corequisites refer to subjects or-topics which the candidate must either pass before enrolling in the particular subject or be taking concurrently.

3. Under examination regUlations "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some auempt has been made to indicate for each subject how lI;SSessment is detennined. See particularly the general statement in the Department of Mathematics section headed "Progressive Assessment" refening to Mathematics subjects.

4. Texts are books recommended for purchase;

5. References are books relevant to the subject or topic which not be purchased.

. The credit point values associated with each subject are wn to the right of the subject description.

Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions BIOLIOI PLANT & ANIMAL BIOLOGY 6cp

Prerequisites Nil- see notes on BIOUOI under "Advisory Prerequisites for mtry to the Faculty"

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content The course is organised into 2 units

Unitt

Plant Diversity - Fonn and Function

Tlume Plant diversity as a consequence of adaptation for survival in a range of environments.

Topics

The major plant groups and their life cycles. Higher plant structure and function. Growth and differentiation. Control of plant development.

Unit 2

Animal Diversity - Fonn and Function

Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations which have allowed animals to exploit the wide range of available environments.

Topics

The Animal Phyla - organisatIon of tissues and organs, body plans, body cavities, patterns of development.

Animal Function - digestion, circulation, respiration, integration and control, homeostasis, reproduction and development.

35

SECTION FIVE

Texts

Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. Biological Science 4th edn (Norton, 1986)

or

Curtis, H. Biology 4th edn. (Worth, 1983)

Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et at Th£ Penguin Dictionary o/Biology (penguin, 1985)

References

Buchsbaum, et a1 Animals WitJUJut Backbones (Univ. Chicago Press, 1987)

BIOLl02 CELL BIOWGY, GENETICS 6cp & EVOLUTION

Prerequisite SeenotesonBIOLl 01 under"Advisory Prerequisites for Entry to the Faculty".

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester. A compulsory 2 day excursion will be held in the mid-year break.

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Cell Biology

Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells.

Topics

Biological molecules - the structure of proteins, carbohydrates and lipidS.

Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and principal function, evolution of cells.

Biological energy processes - photosynthesis, cellular respiration.

Genetics

Cell division, Mendelian genetics, Scientific method. Molecular biology. Gene action, development and differentiation. Probability. Tests of significance. Immunology.

An introduction to ecology, population genetics and evolution.

Texts

Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. Biological Science 4th edn (Norton, 1986)

OR

Curtis, H. Biology 4th edn (Worth, 1983)

Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et aI. TIu! Penguin Dictionary of Biology (penguin, 1985)

References

Ayala, F.M. & Kiger, J.A. Modern Genetics (Benjamin Cummings, 1984)

Moroney, M.J. Factsfrom Figures (penguin, 1984)

36

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Parker, R.E. fntroductoryStatisticsforBiology{EdwardAmold,1973)

Strickberger, M.W. Genetics 3rd edn (Macmillan/Collier, 1985)

(Students proceeding to BIOL205, Molecular Genetics, are advised to purchase this book).

BIOL201 BIOCHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOL101 and BIOLI02

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Carbohydrates,lipids, amino acids and proteins. Vitamins and coenzymes. Enzymes. Intennediary metabolism.

Text

Zubay,G. Bioclu!mistry 2nd edn (MacMillan, 1988)

References

Conn, E.li, Stumpf, P.K. et al OUilines of Bioclu!mistry 5th edn (Wiley 1987)

Lehninger, A.L. Principles of Biochemistry: General Aspects 7th edn (McGraw-Hill,1983)

McGilvery, R.W. Bioclu!mistry. A FunctionalApproach 3rd edn (Saunders, 1983)

BI0L202 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlO1 and BIOLI02

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Consideration of the processes involved in the transport of oxygen in mammals and emphasizing the relation between structure and function. The course examines molecule, cell and tissue structure and function, particularly of nerve and muscle, the respiratory and cardiovascular systems, comparative energetics and control systems.

References

Eckert, R. & Randall, D.

6cp

Animal Physiology Mechanisms and Adaptations 3rd edn (Freeman & Co., 1983) ,

Bloom, W. & Fawcett, D.W. A Textbook of Histology 10th edn (Saunders, 1975)

Prosser, C.L. ComparativeAnimalPhysiology3rdedn(Saunders, 1973)

Ruch, T.C. & Patton, H.D. Physiology and Biophysics II CirculationRespirationanJ Fluid Baklnce. 20th edn (Saunders, 1974)

SECflONFIVE

Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia, A. Morphogenesis of the Vertebrates 4th edn (John Wiley, 1979)

BIOL203 POPULATION DYNAMICS

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlOI and BIOL102

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Physical and biological factors influencing the abundance and distribution of organisms. Theories of popUlation and control.

Texl

Krebs, C.J. Ecology 3rd edn (Harper & Row, 1985)

References

Pianka, RR EvolUlionary Ecology (Harper & Row, 1978)

Recker, H., Lunney, D. & Dunn, I.(eds) A Natural Legacy (pergamon Press, 1979)

Krebs, CJ. Ecological Methodology (Harper & Row, 1989)

BIOL204 CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlOl and BIOL102

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Cellular organisation and inter-relationships. Organelles, their structure & function. Cellular processes.

Tex!

Alberts, B., Bray, D. et al Molecular Biology of the CeU2nd edn (Garland, 1989)

BI0L20S MOLECULAR GENETICS

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOLl01 andBIOLl02

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping and recombination. DNA structure, replication and repair, Gene action and its control. Immunogenetics.

Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering

Text

Strickberger, M.w. Genetics 3rd edn (Macmillan/Collier, 1985)

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Old, RW. & Primrose, S.B. Principles of Gene Manipukltion 3rd edn (Blackwell, 1985)

References

Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell 2nd edn (Garland 1989)

Maniatis, T., Fritsch, E.F. & Sambrook, J. MokcuJarCloning (ColdSpring Harbor Laboratory, 1982). Second edition is anticipated.

BIOL206 PLANT PHYSIOWGY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology I

Prerequisites 1991 BIOLIOl and BIOL102

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Fundamental processes peculiar to plant cells are examined. These include cell water relations, membrane transport of solutes, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen, and photosynthesis. Cellular regulation of the processes is emphasized.

Texl

Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. Pklnt Physiology 3rd edn (YVadsworth 1985)

BI0L301 CELL PROCESSES

Prerequisite 1990 Biology lIA or llB including 712103 Biochemistry

Prerequisites 1991 BIOL201 and one further BIOL200

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Biochemical and cellular aspects of mammalian hormones will be considered together with their role in homeostasis. The biochemistry of blood and the digestion and absorption of foodstuffs will also be major topics for consideration.

References

Lehninger, A.L. Principles of Bioclu!mistry (Worth, 1982)

Smith, E.L., Hill, R.L., et al PrinciplesofBioclu!mistry.MammalianBioch2mistry.7th edn (McGraw-Hill, 1983)

BIOL302 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology llA or llB

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Biology of reproduction with particular emphasis on sexual differentiation and gamete physiology.

6cp

37

SECfIONFIVE

References

Johnson, M.H. & Everitt, B.J. EssenJial Reproduction (Blackwell, 1980)

Setchell, B.P. The Mammalian Testis (paul Elel(. 1978)

Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia, A. MorpJwgenesis of the Vertebrates 4thedn (Wiley, 1979)

BIOL303 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology IIA or lIB

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Environmental impacts on whole plant growth are interpreted in tenns of the responses of susceptible components of key physiological processes. The processes examined include whole-plant water relations, photosynthesis, mineral ion acquisition and nutrient transport.

References

Milthorpe, F.L. & Moorby, J. An introduction to Crop Physiology 2nd edn (Cambridge U.P., 1980)

Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. Plant Physiology 3rd edn (Wadsworth 1985)

BI0L304 WHOLE PLANT DEVELOPMENT

Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or lIB

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

The development of higher plant structure from meristematic tissue. Developmental control. Structural adaptations ranging from gross morphology to cell ultrastructure to maintain development under environmental stress.

References

Burgess, 1 An Introduction to Plant Cell Development (Cambridge U.P., 1985)

Esau, K. Anatomy of Seed Plants (Wiley, 1960)

BIOL30S IMMUNOLOGY

Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or llB

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

38

6cp

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBIECTDESCRIPTIONS ~SE",CT~IO~N~FIVE= _________________________ C=IIEM~~I",S:2TR"Y,-"S~UBIE~~CT:..'...'D"ES~C"RIPT~"IO"N~S

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Molecular and cellular aspects of the function of the immune system including phylogeny, reproductive and tumour immunology.

Text

Roitt, 1M. Essenliallmmunology 6th edn (Blackwell, 1988)

BIOL306 ECOLOGY & EVOLUTION

Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or Biology IIB

Prerequisites 1991 BIOL203 and one other BIOL200

Hours 2 hours per week and two 3 day excursions and two half day excursions

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Structure and dynamics of biological communities. Population genetics and evolutionary ecology. The majority of the practical component of the topic will be undertaken on two excursions.

Text

Krebs, CJ. Ecology 3rd edn (IIaq>er & Row, 1985)

References

Krebs, J.R & Davies, N.B. Behavioural &ology (Blackwell, 1978)

BI0L307 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY OF PLANT 6cp DEVELOPMENT

Prerequisite 1990 Biology IIA or 1m Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL2QO including one ofBIOL201 or BIOL204 or BIOL205

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Regulation of plant growth and development by three interacting genetic systems, hormones and environment. Emphasis on genetic manipulation for plant improvement involving cell culture, somatic hybridisation and genetic engineering.

References

Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al Molecular B;ology of the Cel/2nd edn (Garland, 1989)

Grierson, D. and Covey, S.N. Plant Molecular Biology 2nd edn (Blackie, 1988)

BI0L308 MAMMALIAN DEVELOPMENT

Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or IIB

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200 including one of BIOL201 orBIOL204

HOUTS 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Theme The development ofindependent function.Topics include: Gametes and fertilization, cleavage and preimplantation development, classical developmental models, implantation and the placenta, defects in development, embryo technologies, the neonate and lactation.

References

Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell (Garland, 1989)

Walbot, V. & Holder, N. Developmenlal Biology (Random House, 1987)

Browder, L.W. Developmenlal Biology 2nd edn (Saunders College, 1984)

Austin, C.R & Short, R. V. Reproduction in Mammals Vols. I & 2, 2nd edn (Cambridge, 1982)

BI0L309 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 6cp Not offered in 1990

Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200 including one of BIOL201 orBIOL205

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

COn/enl

To be advised.

Chemistry Subject Descriptions CHEMI0l CHEMISTRY 101 6cp Students who have not studied Chemistry previously are strongly advised to read the first six chapters in the main text (Brown and LeMay) before commencement of the academic year.

Advisory subjects At least Mruhematics (2 unit course), Chemistry (2 unit course), and Physics (2 unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in each case.

Hours 3 lecture hours, 1 hour of tutorial and 2 hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.

Examination One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Con/enl

General Chemistry (approximruely 15 lectures)

Revision of basic chemical principles.lntroduction to atomic and molecular concepts. Simple ionic and covalent bonding models.

Organic Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures)

Historical developmenLThe shapes, structures and names of organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups, synthesis, differentiation and structural elucidation of organic compounds. Applications of organic chemistry.

Texts

Aylward, G.H. & Findlay, T.J.V. S1. Chemical Data 2nd edn (Wiley, 1974)

Brown,W.H.

Introduction to Organic Chemistry 4th edn (Wadsworth student edn, 1988)

Brown, T.L and LeMay, H.E. Chemistry. The Central Science 4th edn (Prentice-Hall, 1988)

Lehman, J.W.

Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry (Allyn & Bacon, 1984)

CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102

PrerequiSite CHEMI01

6cp

Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 hour of tutorial and 2 hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.

ExamiJuJtion One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Inorganic Chemistry (approximately 13 lectures)

Inorganic solids and their structures.Simple molecular orbital theory and bonding in metals. Transition metal chemistry; coordination compounds.

39

ki

SECfION FIVE

Physical Chemistry (approximately 26 lectures)

Chemical equilibria; thermodynamics; electrochemistry; chemical kinetics.

Text

Brown, T.L & LeMay, H.E. Ch£mistry-The Central Science 4th edn (Prentice-Hall, 1988)

CHEM201 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I

Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02

6cp

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ContenJ

Evaluationand manipulation of analytical data; titrimetric methods of analysis including theory of acid-base, complex formation and oxidation - reduction titrations.

Selected instrumental methods of analysis, atomic spectroscopy, absorption spectrophotometry, potentiometric techniques, gas chromatography.

Text

Hargis, LG. Analytical Ch£mistry, PrinciplesandT echniques (Prentice­HalI,1988)

CHEM202 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I

Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02

6cp

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ConJent

Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Coordination complexes and metal ion-ligand interactions; symmetry and structure.

Introductions to reactions and mechanisms, spectroscopic methods, bonding and ligand field theory in coordination compounds, and organometallic chemistry.

Text

Cotton, F.A., Wilkinson, G., Gauss, P.L. Basic Inorganic Chemistry 2nd edn (Wiley, 1987)

CHEM203 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisile 1990 Chemistry I

Prerequisite 1991 CHEM102

40

6cp

CHEMlliTRYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS "S=Ecr~I_0_N_AVE~~ __________________________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work. will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work. is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

ContenJ

A course covering the basic chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic compounds and their spectroscopic properties. Nucleophilic substitutions in aliphatic systems. Preparation of alkenes and alkynes by elimination. Addition reactions of alkenes and alkynes. Carbonyl group reactions. Spectroscopic methods of structure determination, infra-red, proton magnetic resonance, mass spectrometry. Electrophilic substitution in aromatic systems. Reactions of aromatic compounds.

Texts

Solomons, T.W.G. Organic Ch£mistry 4th edn (Wiley, 1988)

OR

Morrison, R.T., Boyd, R.N. Organic Ch£mistry 5th edn (Allyn & Bacon, 19&7) (Recommended for students proceeding to Level3 subjects

Model Kit: Lehman, J.W. Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry (Allyn & Bacon, 1984)

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Each of these SUbjects will consist of three topics drawn from the following list. The offering of certain topics in anyone year will depend on staff availability. For 1990 the subject compositions will be:

CHEM205: Topics 2, 3, and 4. CHEM206: Topics I, 6, and 7. Topics I Industrial metal chemistry 2 Industrial organic chemistry 3 Photochemistry 4 Pollution evaluation 5 Inorganic solids and non-aqueous systems 6 Solid state chemistry 7 Laboratory organic analysis 8 Electrochemical technology 9 Application of spectroscopy

CHEM301 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSES AND 6cp CHROMATOGRAPHY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry ITA

CHEM204 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 6q Prerequisite 1991 CHEM201

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I

Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will co for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory w is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Chemical Dynamics-rate laws of chemical kinetics; principJ of mechanism determination; transition state theory; electro! activity; thermodynamics of galvanic cells.

Fundamentals of Atomic Spectroscopy - spin-orbit coup . L-S coupling scheme.

FundamentalsofMolecularSpectroscopy-vibration,rotati vibration-rotation of diatomic molecules.

Group Theory - recognition of point groups for an array different molecules; infrared and Raman allowed vibrations.

Text

Atkins, P.W. Physical Chemistry 3rd edn (Oxford, 1982)

CHEM205 CHEM206

APPLIED CHEMISTRY 205 APPLIED CHEMISTRY 206

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I

Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or20% of~: final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work 18 a prereqUISIte for a pass in the subject.

Content

Principles of selected instrumental techniques (e.g. emission spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Automated analysis. Solvent extraction; chromatography (theory and techniques).

Text

Ciuistian, G.D. & O'Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis 2nd edn (Allyn & Bacon, 1986)

CHEMJ02 TRACE ANALYSIS AND CHEMOMETRICS

6cp

Prj!requisites 1990 Chemistry ITA, and Mathematics I or IS.

Prerequisites 1991 CHEM201, MATHI02

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of latMJratory work each week for one semester.

Extunination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work 1& a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

C(lnlent

~ci~les of selected instrumental methods used in trace ana1ysis; lD.clUding flow injection analysis and ion chromatography.

Chemometrics (computer assisted dataacquisition and extraction of chemical infonnation from the raw data).

Text (advisory)

Christian, G.D. & O'Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis 2nd edn (Allyn and Bacon, 1986)

CHEM303 COORDINATION AND 6cp ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry ITA

Prerequisite 1991 CHEM202

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or 20% of~: final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work IS a prereqUISIte for a pass in the subject.

Content

A general course exploring the range of modem inorganic chemistry, including synthesis, reactivity and applications of spectroscopic methods.

Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination chemistry; isomerism, f-block elements; inorganic reaction mechanisms; electron transfer and voltammetry.

OrganometallicChemistry-maingroupandtransitionrneta1s; structure and bonding; reactions, carbonyl and olefin complexes; applications in industrial catalysis.

Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational ~pectros<:<>py; nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; mtroducbon to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer, electron spin resonance, and chiroptical spectroscopy).

Text

Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.e.

An Introduction to Inorganic Clu!mistry (International Edition) (Holt-Saunders, 1980)

CHEM304 BIOINORGANIC AND CLUSTER CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry IIA

Prerequisite 1991 CHEM202

6cp

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will COUnt for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the su bject.

Content

A course designed to deal at more depth with specialist areas selected from the broad canvas of inorganic chemistry.

Coordination and Bioinorganic Chemistry

Synth~s of comp le~es of multidentate and macrocyclic ligands; metal-directed reacttons and stereoselectivity; metailoproteins and metalloenzymes; bioelectrochemistry and redox proteins.

41

Polymetallic Compounds and Cluster Chemistry

Metal-metal bonding; lower halide clusters. boranes; organo~ transition metal clusters; one-dimensional and super -oonductivity.

Text

No formal text; material to be advised.

CHEM30S MECHANISTIC AND SYNTHETIC 6cp ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry IIA

Prerequisite }991 CHEM203

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

A course emphasising the mechanistic and synthetic aspects of organic reactions. Nucleophilic aromatic substitution. Reactive intermediates, arynes, carbenes and nitrenes. Carbanion chemistry. Reactions of conjugated systems, cycloaddition reactions. Rearrangements and neighbouring group participation. Oxidation and reduction in organic chemistry. Applications of tH and uC nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry in structural elucidation.

Text As for CHEM203 plus

Williams, D.H., & Fleming, I. Spectroscopic Metlwds in Organic Chemistry 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1988)

Model Kit (as for CHEM203)

CHEM306 HETEROCYCLIC & BIOLOGICAL 6cp ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite }990 Chemistry ITA

Prerequisite 1991 CHEM203

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/Workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

A course covering the occurrence, importance, reactions and synthesis of the heterocyclic and more important groups of biologically active compounds. Reactions and synthesis of simple heterocyclic systems containing one and two heteroatoms. Carbohydrates, amino acids and proteins. Nucleic acids. Antibiotics, anti-cancer agents, insecticides, and plant growth regulators.

Texl

To be advised

42

SUBJECT

CHEM307 ELECTRODICS AND QUANTUM CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite }990 Chemistry IIA, and Mathematics I or IS

Prerequisites }991 CHEM204, MATHI02

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will for 20% of the fmal assessment but a pass in the laboratory is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Electrodics - the metal solution interface and structure of double layer, rates of charge transfer reactions; determination

introduction to corrosion.

Quantum Chemistry

Texl

To be advised

CHEM308 PHOTOELECTRON SPECTROSCOPY AND ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION

Prerequisites 1990 Chemistry ITA, Mathematics I or IS

Prerequisites 1991 CHEM204, MATHI02

Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

GENERAL INFORMATION [General information relating to the Schools of Administration & Technology, Education, Health and Visual & Performing Arts(formerly .attached to the Hunter Institute of Higher Education) may be found in Volume 10 of the University Calendar.]

Principal Dates 1990 (See seplU1lte entry fOf Faculty of Medicine)

J,Duary

M()I1day Public Holiday - New Year's Day

5 Friday lAst day for return of Application for Re-Emolment Forms - Continuing Students

B Monday Deferred Examinations begin

Friday Deferred Ruminations end

Friday Public Holiday - Australia Day

Wednesday New students attend in person to enrol and pay charges

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will COl.'''''''' for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory TlU:sday is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. Ne~ students attend in person to enrol and pay charges

Friday

Content TlU:sday

Photoelectron Spectroscopy - including some Re-emolment Approval Sessions for re-enrolling stUdents lasers. Friday

Tuesday Late emolment session for new students Group Theory - symmetry orbitals, etc. itT

".,ldMsday Late enrolment session for re-enrolling students Atomic Spectroscopy - J -J coupling, Grotian diagrams MOilday First Semester begins

Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion -structure of solids; the semiconductor/solution photoexcitation at the semiconductor/solution electrochemical photo-galvanic cells and e1ectn)ch,emi. photovoltaic cells.

Texl

To be advised

Friday Last day for variation of programme in relation to HECS liability for Semester I.'

Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences

Monday Lectures lesume

Last day for withdrawal without academic penalty from first semester subjects (See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)

Wedl!esday Public Holiday - Anzac Day

Priday First Semester ends

MOtiday Examinations begin

MOItd4y Public HOliday - Queen's Birtlxlay

Friday Examinations end

Closing date for applications for selecrion to the Bachelor of Medicine and the Diploma in Aviation Science courses in 1991

be processed by the re1eWll11 3} AlI&wt SeflUster I/)

PRINCIPAL DATES [990

July

2J Monday Second Semester begins

August

6 Monday Last day for withdrawal without academic penalty from full year subjects (See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)

23 Thursday Last day for variation of programme in relation to HECS liability for Semester II.'

September

17 Monday Last day for withdrawal without academic penaky from Second semester SUbjects(See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)

22 Salurday Mid Semester break begins

28 Friday Closing date for applications for enrolment 1990 (Undergraduate COurses other than Medicine and AViation)

Cklober

MOilday Public HOliday - Labor Day

8 Monday Lectures resume

November

2 Friday Second Semester ends

5 MOilday Annual Examinations begin

23 Friday Armual Examinations end

1991 February

25 MO/'Iday First Term beginsa

DATES FOR THE 1990 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR THE BACHELOR OF MEDICINE PROGRAMME

Yearl

Semester I

Semester 2

commences Monday 26 February, 1990 recess Friday 13 April, 1990

to Friday 20 April, 1990

resumes Monday 23 April, 1990 concludes FridaY291une, 1990

commences Monday 161uJy, 1990 recess Monday 24 Sept, 1990

to Friday 5 October, 1990

resumes Monday 8 October, 1990 concludes Friday 26 October, 1990

a daJe yet to be Jitwlised

ADVICE AND INFORMATION

Examinations commence Monday 5 November. 1990

conclude Friday 16 November, 1990

Mini-Elective commences Monday 19 November, 1990

concludes Friday 30 November, 1990

Nan<" SerM~er OIU consisls of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 }Web of Block Two. SeIMsfer Two consists of 'he remaining 3 wuks of Black Two and all of

B/ockThree (10 weeks).

Year Two

Semester One commences Monday 26 February. 1990

"""" Friday 13 April, 1990 to

Friday 20 April. 1990

resumes Monday 23 April. 1990

concludes Friday 29 June, 1990

Semester Two commences Monday 16 July. 1990

"""" Monday 24 Sept, 1990 ID

Friday 5 October, 1990 ",,"m~ Monday 8 October, 1990

concludes Friday 26 October, 1990

Examinatiom commence Monday 5 November. 1990

conclude Friday 16 November, 1990

Mini_Elective commences Monday 19 November, 1990 concludes Friday 30 November, 1990

~=:ter OM consists o/BlockFour (10 weds) and 7wee~ ojBlockFille. Serruster Two cOflSisfs of Ihe remaining 3 weekr of Block FIve and all of Block Six (10 weeks),

Year Tbree

Block 7 Feb 12 _ May4 12 weeks: 11 week term

1 week AVCC/Easter Vacation 13/.4.20/4

Block 8 May 7 June 29 8w_

Vacation July 2 July 13 2 weeks (A Vee common week)

Block 9 July 16 - Sept 14 9 weeks: 8 week term 1 week review 1019-14/9

Stuvac Sept 17 - Sept 21 I w,,"

Assessment Sept24- Oct 12 3w_

Vacation Oct 15 Oct 19 I...".

Elective Oct 22 Dec 14 8w_

Year Four

Clinical Attaclunent 1a Fob 5 Mar 16 6w_

Clinical Attaclunent Ib Mar 19 - May 4 6 week tenn plus 1 week AVCC/Easter Vacation 13/4-2014

Vacation May 7 - May II Iwm

Clinical Attaclunent 2a May 14- June 22 6w_

Clinical Attaclunent 2b Jun625 - Aug 3 6w"""

Vacation Aug 6 - Aug 17 2w"""

Clinical Attaclunent 3a Aug20 - Sept 28 6w"""

Clinical Attachment 3b Oct I Nov 9 6w"""

GP Period Nov 12 - Nov 21 One and a half weeks (inclusive)

Stuvac Nov22 - Nov 30 One and a half weeks

Assessment De'" - D",7 I wuk

Nolt: Ytars 3.4 & 5 do not conform with Ihe University o/Newcastle'sSemi!sler

dates.

ii

Year Five

GP Attachment Fob 5 Feb 16 2w"""

Clinical Attaclunent 1 Feb 19 Mar 23 5w_

Clinical Attaclunent 2 Mar26 - Apr 27 5 w"'" (Eastet 13/4-1714)

Clinical Attaclunent 3 AJX'30 - June 1 5 w"'"

Assessment June 4 - lune8 I wrei<

Vacation June II - lune IS I week

Clinical Attaclunent 4 lune 18- July 20 5w"""

Clinical Attaclunent 5 July23 - Aug 24 5 w"'"

Stuvac Aug27 - Aug3} I week

Assessment Sept 3 - Sept 14 2 w"'"

2nd A.ssessmenl Sept 17 - Sept 21 I wrei<

Elective Sept24- Nov 16 8w"""

Final Assessment Nov 19 - Nov 23 I wool<

Advice and Information Advice and information on matters concerning the Faculties of the University can be obtained from a number of people.

Faculty Secretaries For general enquiries about University regulations, Faculty rules and policies, studies within the University and so on, students may consult

Facully Facully Secretary Phone Architecture Mrs Dianne Rigney' 685634

Art< Ms Chris Wood' 685296

Economics & Mrs Linda Harrigan' 685695

Commerce

Education Mr Peter Day' 685417

Engineering Mr Geoff Gordon ~ 685630

Ms Jill Norburn ' 685630

Medicine Mr Brian Kelleher" 685613

Science & Ms Helen Hotchkiss' 685330

Mathematics

For enquiries regarding particular studies within a faculty or departm Sub-deans, Deans or Departmental Heads (see staff section) should

contacted. Cashier's omce lst Floor McMullin Building.

Hours 10am- 4pm Accommodation Omcer Mrs Kath Dacey, phone 685520 located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics.

Careers and Student Employment Omcer

Ms Helen Parker, phone 685466 located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics.

Counselling Service phone 685255 located on the courtyard level Library building.

Health Service phone 685763 located in the basement of the Union Building.

Student Loans phone 685601 .. . located in Student Administration. McMullin BUildmg.

, located in room £4.209 inlhe Enginuring Buildings 'loculed in tM Student and Faculty Administration Offi~e. , loculed in room W329 in Ihe Behavioural SciefICes BUlldlflg ~ located in room EA206 in the Engilltering Buildings 'locaud in room £4.204 in. the Engineering Buildings "located in room 6()7A on 1M 6tlljloor. of Ihe. M.edical ScieflCe Building 'located in room V18 inlhe MathelrlQllcs BUllmng

sTUDENTS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity to students with Special Needs.

If you have a disability of any form and feel you need some additional assistance, please do not hesilate to contact one of the following:

Faculty Advisers Architecture

Arts Economics & Commerce Education Engineering Medicine

Science & Mathematics Student Administration Auchmuty Library

Mr Malcolm Park - ext 529 Ass/Prof Don Parkes - ext 659 Mr Bruce Cheek (Sub Dean) - ext 697 Dr Bill Warren - ext 271 Dr David Wood - ext 431 Sr Sue Graff - 266170 Mrs Lyn McBriarty - ext 519 Ass/ProfWarren Brisley - ext 678 Mrs Sandra Box - ext 303 Ms Alicia Hardy - ext 298 Ms Anne Robinson - ext 252

Student Representative Council Mr Steve Watkins - ext 329

ENROLMENT OF NEW STUDENTS

Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Great Hall early in February toenroland pay charges. Detailed instructions are given in the Offer of Enrolment.

TRANSFER OF COURSE

Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate Bachelordegree course who wish to transfer to a different undergraduate Bachelor degree course (excluding Medicine) must complete an Application for Course Transfer form and lodge it with their Application for Re-enrolmentat the Student Administration Office by 5 January 1990.

If a student's request to transfer to another course is successful, the studentmustcomplete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Payment Option fogn for the new course.

RE·ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS

T;here are four steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing students: • collection of the re-enrolment kit • lodging the Application for Re-enrolment fonn with details of

your proposed programme • attendance at the GreatHall for enrolment approval. and • payment of the General Service Charge.

(Students who are in research higher degree programmes re-enrol and pay charges by mail).

Re-Enrolment Kits Re-enroImentkits for 1990 will be available for collection in October. There-enrolmentkit contains the student's Appl ication for Re-enrolment Conn, the 1990 Class Timetable, the Statement of Charges Payable for 1990 and re-enrolment instructions.

LodgIng Application for Re-Enrolment Forms The Application for Re-enrolment fonn must be completed carefully and lodged at the Student Administration Office by 5 January 1990. Students should know their examination results before completing the re-enrolment form. There is no late charge payable if the form is late, but itisvery important that the Application for Re-enrolmentfonn is lodged by 5 January 1990 as late lodgement will mean thatenrolmentapproval 'Will not be possible before the late re-enrolment session.

Enrolment Approval AIl re-enrolling students (except those enrolled in the BMed) are required to attend at the Great Hall on a specific date and time during the period 13-16 February 1990. Enrolment Approval dates are on posters on University Noticeboards and are included in the enrolment kits issued 10 students in December. When auending for Enrolment Approval

ADVICE AND INFORMATION

students will collect their approved 1990 programme and student card. AnyvariationstotheproposedprogrammerequireapprovaJ.Enrolments in tutorial or laboratory sessions will be arranged. Slaff from academic Departments will be available to answer enquiries.

A service charge of $20 will be imposed on students who re-enrol after the specified date.

Payment of Charges The re-enrolment kit issued to re-enrolling students includes a Statement of Charges Payable fonn which must accompany the paymentof charges for 1990. These charges may be paid at any time after receiving the re­enrolment kit.

All charges, including debts outstanding to Ihe University, must be paid before or upon re-enrolment - part paymentoftotal amountdue will not be accepted by the cashier.

Payment by mail is encouraged; alternatively by cheque or money order lodged in the internal mail deposit box outside the Cashier's Office in the McMullin Building. The receipt will be mailed to the student.

Payment by cash at the Cashier's Office may lead to queues at enrolment time.

The Cashier's Office will be open for extended hours during the enrolment approval sessions in the period 13-16 February 1990. Afterwards any further payment should be by mail only.

LATE PAYMENT

Payment of the General Services Charge is due before or upon re­enrolment. The final date for payment is the date of the Re-enrolment Approval session for the course concerned in the period 13-16February 1990, after which a late charge applies at the rate of:

$10 if payment is received up to and including 7 days after the due date;

$20 if payment is received between 8 and 14 days after the due date; or

$30 if payment is received 15 or more days after the due date.

Thereafter enrolment will be cancelled if charges remain unpaid by 30 March.

STUDENT CARDS

When attending for Enrolment Approval, students will be given their Approved Programme fonn which incorporates the Student Card. The Student Card should be carried by students when at the University as evidence of enrohnent. The Student Card has machine readable lettering for use when rorrowing books from theUniversityLibrary, andconlains' the student's interim password for access to facilities of the Computing Centre.

Students are urged to take good care of their Student Card. If the card is lost or destroyed, there is a service charge of $5 payable before the card will be replaced.

A srudent who withdraws completely from studies should return the Student Card to the Student Administration Office.

RE-ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE

A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has been enrolled previously at the University ofNewcastle,bul not ellTolied in1989, is required toapply for admission again through the Universities and Colleges Admissions Centre, Locked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141.

Application forms may be obtained from the UCAC or from the Student Adminislration Office and close with the UCAC on 29 September each year. There is a $50 fee for late applications.

iii

ADVICE AND INFORMATION

ATTENDANCE STATUS

A candidate for any qualification other than apostgraduate qualification who is enroUed in three quarters or more of a normaJ full-time programme shall be deemed to be a full-time student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part-time course or less than three-quarters of a fuU-time programme shall be deemed to be a part-time studenL

A candidate for a postgraduate qualification shall enrol as either a full­time or a part-time student as determined by the Faculty Board.

CHANGE OF ADDRESS

Students are responsible for notifying the Student Administration Office in writing of any change in their address. A Change of Address form should be used and is available from the StudentAdminiSlration Office.

Failure to notify changes could lead to important correspondence or course information not reaching the studenL The University cannot accept responsibility if official communications fail to reach a student who has not notified the Student Administration Office of a change of address.

It should benated that examination results will be available for collection in the Drama Workshop in mid December. Results not collected will be mailed to students. Students who will be away during the long vacation from their regular address should make arrangements to have mail forwarded.

CHANGE OF NAME

StudentswhochangetheirnameshouldadvisetheStudentAdministration Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records.

CHANGE OF PROGRAMME

Approval must be sought for any changes to the programme for which a student has enrolled. This includes adding or withdrawing subjects, or changing attendance starus (for example from full-time to part-time)

All proposed changes should be entered on the Variation oj Programme section on the reverse side of your Approved Programme fonn. Reasons for changes and where appropriate documentary evidence in thefonn of medical or other appropriate certificates must be submitted.

WITHDRAWAL

Application to withdraw from a subject should bemadeon the Variation of Programme section on thereversesideofyour Approved Programme fonn and lodged at the Student Administration Office or mailed to lhe Secretary.

Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the subject or subjects in question.

FuUYear Subjects Monday

6 August 1990

Withdrawal Dates

Fint Semester Subjects Monday

23 April 1990

Secotul Semester Subjects Monday

17 September 1990

WUhdrawaJ after the above dates will normally lead to afailure being recorded against the subject or subjects unless the Dean ollhe F acully grants permission for the student to wUhdraw wilhout afailure being recorded.

IT a student believes that a failure should not be recorded because of the circumstances leading to his or her withdrawal, it is important that full details of these circumstances be provided with the application to withdraw.

iv

CONFIRMATION OF ENROLMENT

Students should ensure that all details on their Approved Programme fonn are correcL Failure tocheck this infonnation could create problems at examination time.

FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS

Any student who is indebted to the University by reason of non-payment of any fee or charge, non·payment of any fine imposed, or who has failed to pay any overdue debts shall not be pennitted to

• complete enrolment in a following year • receive a transcript of academic record; or • graduate or be awarded a Diploma,

until such debts are paid.

Students are requested to pay any debts incurred without delay.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE

A student who does not wish to re-enrol for any period up to three yecm should write to The Secretary and ask for leave of absence. Leave of absence is nonnally granted only to those swdents who are in standing. Applications should be submitted before the end of week of first term in the first year for which leave of absence is Leave of absence will not be granted formore than lhree years and not be granted relrospectively.

Anotice board on the wall opposite the entrance to Lecture Theatre B is used for the specific purpose of displaying examination timNables and other notices about examinations.

STUDENT MA TIERS GENERALLY

'!be main notice board is the display point for notices concerning enrohnentmatters. scholarships, University rules and travel c.oncessions, etc. This notice board is located on the path between the Union and the Library.

Examinations

Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from time to time. In meassessmentof a student's progress in a un iversity course, consideration will be given to laboratory work, tutorials and assignments and to any term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such assessments and class work may be in~ated with those of formal written eltaminations.

EXAMINATION PERIODS

Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the following periods:

Mid Year: 11 to 29 June, 1990

End of Year: 5 to 23 November, 1990

In the case of the B.Med. degree the following applies: Timetablesshowing the time and place at which individual examinations

at the completion of an academic year, a candidate whose P",fo,,",,"o'l will beheld willbepostedontheexaminationsnoticeboardnearLecture is deemed by the Faculty Board to be satisfactory may be Theatre B (opposite the Great Hall).

of absence under such conditions as the Faculty Board Misreading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be Such leave will not normally be granted for more than one year. accepted as au eXCUse for failure to attend an examination.

Application for re-admission to undergraduate degree courses made through the UCAC (see p iii).

A TfENDANCE AT CLASSES

SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS

Formal examinations, where prescribed, are compulsory. Swdents should consult the final timetable in advance to fmd out the date, time and place

Where a student's attendance or progress has not bee"n~::::,::::~1 oflheir examinations and should allow themselves plenty of time to get action may be taken under the Regulations Governing l to the examination room so that they can take advantage of the 10 Progress. minutes reading time that is allowed before the examination commences.

Theseatallocation list for examinations will be placedon the Noticeboard In the case of illness or absence for some other unavoidable cause,

. subject, and on a noticeboard outside the student may be excused for non attendance at classes.

All applications in writing to the Head of the Departmentoffering the subject. or tenn examinations have been missed, this fact should be noted application.

The granting of an exemption from auendance at classes with it any waiver of the General Services Charge.

GENERAL CONDUCT

In accepting membership of the University, students undertake observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University.

Students are expected to conduct themselves at all times in a

be granted:

any writing instrument, drawing not be taken in: they will

if needed. aid. They must be hand held, battery operated

and students should note that no concession

to a srudent who is prevented from bringing into a room a programmable calculator;

to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or

because of battery failure.

fashion. Smoking . FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS

or in the University ;:om~:id;d:.:n:. ::.:,:~~~:~::~;;~~~~::: 15 of the Examination Regulations sets down the rules for Members of the academic staff of the University, senior examinations, as follows: officers, and other persons authorised for d'd

Can I ates shall comply with any instructions given by asupervisor report on disorderly or improper conduct occurring in the relating to the conduct of the examination;

NOTICES

Official University notices are displayed on the notice boards students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of announcements which concern them.

before the examination begins candidates shall not read the eJUUnination paper until granted pennission by the supervisor which shall be given ten minutes before the start of the examination;

no candidate shall enter the examination room after thirty minutes from the time the examination has begun;

EXAMINATIONS

(d) no candidate shall leave the eltamination room during the first thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the examination;

(e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after he has left it unless during the full period of his absence he has been under approved supervision;

(f) a candidate shall not bring into the examination room any bag, paper, book, written material, deviceoraid whatsoever, other than such as may be specified for the particular examination;

(g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour toobtain improper assistance in his work, give or endeavour to give assistance to any other candidate, or commit any breach of good order;

(h) a candidate shall not take from the examination room any examination answer book, graph paper, drawing paper or other material issued to him for use during the examination;

(i) no candidate may 'moke in the .x ... ination ",om.

Any infringement of these rules constiwtes an offence against discipline.

EXAMINATION RESULTS

End of year examination results will be available for collection from the Drama Studio in December. The dates for collection will be put on noticeboards outside the main examination rooms in November. Results not collected will be mailed. Examination results for Semester I subjects will be mailed out by the Friday before Semester II begins.

No results will be given by telephone.

After the release ofboth Semester I and end of year examination results a student may apply to have a result reviewed. There is a charge pel'

subject, which is refundable in the event of an error being discovered. However, it should be noted that examination 'results are released only after careful assessment of srudents' perfonnances and that, amongst other things, marginal failures are reviewed before results are released.

SPECIAL CONSJDERA TION

All applications for special consideration should be made on the Application for Special Consideration fonn. Relevant evidence should be auached to the application (see Regulation 12(2) of the Examination Regulations, Calendar Volume 1). Also refer to Faculty Policy.

Application forms for Special Consideration are available from the Student Administration Office and the University Hea1th Serv ice. Before a srudent's application for special consideration will be considered OIl

the ground of personal illness it will be necessary for a medical certificate to be furnished in the form set out on the Application.

If a srudentis affected by illness during an examination and wishes to ask for special consideration, he or she must report to the supervisor in charge of the examination and then make wriuen application to the Secretary within three days of the examination (see Regulation 12(3) of the Examination Regulations, Ca1endar Volume 1). Alsorefer 10 Faculty Policy.

Applicants flY special consideration should note that aFaculty Board is not obliged to grant a special examination. The evidence presented should state the reason why the applicant was unable to attend an examination or how preparation for an examination was disrupted. If the evidence is in the form of a medical certificate the Doctor should state the narure of the disability and specify that the applicant was unfit to attend an examination on a particular day or could attend but that the performance of the applicant would be affected by the disability. If the period of disability extends beyond one day the period should be stated.

v

T~~~~~~~ _________________________________________ I' __________________________________________________ C~~~G~~ ~SATISFACTORY PROGRESS -

Unsatisfactory Progress The University has adopted Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory

Progress which are set out below.

Students who become liable for action under the Regulations will be informed accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Year examination results and will be informed oflheprocedure to be followed

if they wish to 'show cause',

Appeals against exclusion must be lodged together with Application for Re-enrohneot forms by Friday 6 January 1989.

The Faculty's progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this volume.

REGULA nONS GOVERNING UNSATISFACTORY

PROGRESS

1.(1)These Regulations are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.1.2.

0)

(3)

These Regulations shall apply to all students of the University except those who are candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor.

In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise

indicates or requires:

"Admissions Committee" means the Admissions Committee of the Senate constituted under By-law 2.3.5;

''Dean'' means the Dean of a Faculty in which a student is

enrolled.

''Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of a Faculty in which a student is enrolled.

2.(1)A student's enrolment in a subject may be terminated by the Head of the Department offering that subject if that student does not maintain a rate of progress considered satisfactory by the Head of Department, Indetermining whether astudentis failing tomaintain satisfactory progress the Head of Department may take into

consideration such factors as:

(2)

(3)

(4)

(a) unsatisfactory attendance at lectures, tutorials, seminars,

laboratory classes or field work;

(b) failure to complete laboratory work;

(c) failure to complete written work or other assignments; and

(d) failure to complete field work.

The enrolment of a student in a subject shall not be terminated pursuant to regulation 2 (1) of these Regulations unless that student has been given prior written notice of the intention to consider the maller with brief particulars of the grounds for so doing and has also been given a reasonable opportunity to make representations either in person or in writing or both.

A student whose enrohnent in a subject is terminated under regulation 2 (1) of these regulations may appeal to the Faculty Board which shall detennine the matler.

A student whose enrolment in a subject is terminated under this Regulation shall be deemed to have failed the subjeCL

3,(1) A Faculty Board may review the academic perfonnance of a student who does not maintain a rate of progress considered satisfactory by the Faculty Board and may determine:

vi

(a) that the student be permitted to continue the course;

(b) that the studentbepermitted tocontinue the course subject to such conditions as the Faculty Board may decide;

(c) that the student be e)(cluded from further enrolment:

(i) in the course; or (ii) in the course and any other course offered in the

Faculty; or (iii) in the Faculty; or

(d) if the Faculty Board considers its powers to deal with the case are inadequate, that thecase be referred to the Admissions Committee together with a recommendation for such action as the Faculty Board considers appropriate.

. a recommendation cr shall arrange for the appeal to be heard by the ! eounciL The Council may confinn the decision of the Admissions

I, eommittee 01' may substitute for it any other decision which the

Admissions Committee is empowered to make pursuant to these ] Regulations,

(2)

8.(1) A student who has been excluded from further enrolment in a Faculty may enrol in a course in anather Faculty Only with the pennission of the Faculty Board of that Faculty and on such cooditions as it may determine after considering any advice from the Dean of the Faculty from which the srudent was e)(cluded. Before a decision is made under regulation 3 (1) (b) (c) or (d) of

these Regulations the srudent shall be given an opporrunity to make representations with respect to the matter either in person or (2)

in writing or both.

A srudent who has been excluded from further enrolment in any course, Faculty or from the University under these Regulations may apply for pennission to enrol therein again provided that in no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the expiration of two academic years from the date of the exclusion. A decision on such application shall be made:

(3) A sludentmay appeal against any decision made under regulatioo. 3 (1) (b) or(c) of these Regulations tothe Admissions Committee

which shall determine the matter.

4, Where the progress ofastudent who is enrolled in a combined course or who has previously been excluded from enrolment in another course or Faculty is considered by the Faculty Board to be unsatisfactory, the Faculty Board shall refer the matter to the Admissions Commitree together with a recommendation for such action as the Faculty Board

considers appropriate.

(a) by the Faculty Board, where the student has been excluded from a single course or a single Faculty, or

(b) by the Admissions Committee, in any other case,

9.(1) A sbJdent whose application to enrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (1) or 8 (2) (a) of these Regulations is rejected by a Faculty Board may appeal to the Admissions Committee.

5.(1) An appeal made by a student to the Admissions Committee (2) pursuant to Regulation 3 (3) of these Regulations shall be in sucla form as may be prescribed by the Admissions Commiuee and shall be made within fourteen (14) days from the date ofpostint

A student whose application toenrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (2) (b) of these Regulations is rejected by theAdmissions Committee may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor,

to the student of the notification of the decision or such further period as the Admissions Committee may accept.

(2) In hearing an appeal the Admissions Committee may take in consideration any circumstances whatsoever including matte not previously raised and may seek such information as it thi . fitconcern ing the academic record orthe appellantand themakl of the detennination by the Faculty Board. Neither the Dean n . the Sub-Dean shall actas a member of the Admissions Commi

(3)

(4)

on the hearing of any such appeal.

The appellant and the Dean or the Dean's nominee shall have right to be heard in person by the Admissions Commiuee.

The Admissions Committee may confirm the decision made by Faculty Board ormay substitute for it any other decision which Faculty Board is empowered tomake pursuant to these Regulatio

6.(1) The Admissions Committee shall consider any case referred to

(2)

(3)

by a Faculty Board and may:

(a) make any decision which the Faculty Board itself coo have made pursuant to regulation 3 (1) (a), (b) or (c) ofth

Regulations; or

(b) exclude the student from enrolment in such other sub'

courses, or Faculties as it thinks fit; or

(c) e)(clude the student from the University.

The Committee shall notmakeany decision pursuant to regulati 6 (1) (b) or (c) of these Regulations unless ithas first given to student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Commi

A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor againstanydecis' made by the Admissions Committee under this Regulation. ~

7, Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Admissi. Committee made under Regulation 6 of these Regulations, the VI Chancellor may refer the matter back to the Admissions Comm iuee w

Charges The General Services Charge (details below) is payable by all students. New undergraduate students are required to pay all charges when they attend to enrol.

Re-enrolling students receive in October each year, as part of their re­enrolment kit, a statement of charges payable. Students are expected to paycbarges in advance of re.-enrolment and payment by mail is requested. The last date for payment of charges without incurring a late charge is the date of the Re-enrolment Approval session for the particular course (m the period 14-17 February 1989).

1. General Services Charge (a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma Plus Students joining Newcastle University Union for the first time

$229 Per annum

$35

(b) Non-Degree Students $35 Newcastle University Union Charge Per annum

the exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date,

2. Late Charges Where the Statement of Charges payable fonn is lodged With all charges payable after the due date • iheceived up to and including 7 days after the due date; $10 ~ if received between 8 and 14 days after the

~-. -• if received 15 or more days after the due date $30

Other Charges ~ Examination under special supervision

) Review of e)(amination results

"}Statement of matriculation status/or -members of the University

$15 per paper

under review

$8

(d) Replacement of Re-enrolment kit

(e) Re-enrolment after the prescribed re.-enrolment approval session

(f) Replacement of Student Card

4. Indebted Students

$10

$20

$5

All charges, including debts outstanding to the University, must be paid before or upon enrolment - part payment of total amount due will not be accepted by the cashier.

METIIOD OF PAYMENT

Students are requested to pay charges due by mailing their cheque and the Statement of Charges Payable fonn to the University Cashier. The Cashier'S internal mail deposit box outside of the Cashier's Office in the McMullin Building may also be used. Payment should be addressed to the Cashier, University of Newcastle, NSW 2308. Cheques and money orders should be payable to the University of Newcastle. Cash payment must be made at the Cashier's Office 1st Floor McMullin Building between the hours of 10 am 104 pm.

mGHER EDUCATION CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS)

The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) was introduced in 1989 by the Federal Government to supplement the funding of higher education in Australia. It requires contributions to be made by students towards the cost of their higher education undertaken from the start of 1989.

All students, apart from some exceptions, enrol1ed in instirutions of higher education from 1989 are liable under the HECS. Exemption from payment of the Higher Education Contribution (HEC) applies to:

a fee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award course"

a student in a "basic nurse education course" a "full-fee-paying overseas sbJdent" a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge" a "fully sponsored overseas student" a student in an "enabling course" a student in a "non-award" course a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate scholarship"

The amount each student contributes depends upon the subjects undertaken each semester and is payable whether the subjects are passed or railed. The total liability depends on the proportion of a standard full time load in which the student is enrolled on the semester census dates, ie March 31 in Semester 1 and August 31 in Semester 2. If a srudent withdraws from a subject after one of the above dates, the liabilty for that subject will stand for that semester,

In 1989 the HEC charge for a standard full time programme was SI,800 for the year or S900 fora semester, This amount will be indexed each year in accordance with the conswner price index..

HECS is administered as part of the enrolment process. Students must select one of three sections on the HECS Payment Options fonn.

On enrolment students must do one of the following:

(a) Elect to pay up-front which would require payment of85% of the contriubtion for the semester, with the balance to hepaid by the Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front for Semester 2 will be asked to do so at the commencement of Semester 2; or

(b) Defertheir HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, in which case they must either provide a tax file number or apply for a tax file nwnber as part of their enrolment. Institutions are required toensure thatthe infonnation given by students on their tax file number application is the same as thaton their enrolment form. vii

=C~AMP~~U=S~TRAFA~~C~A~ND~P~ARK~~lN~G~ ____________________________________________ ~ ______ --~-iI ~SE~cr~[O~N~A~VE~ ________________________________________________ SG~EQO~LOGQQY~S~U~Bffi~cr1Jn~ES~CRWT~~[O~N~S

Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the taxation system are Dot required to make a payment towards their contribution until their taxable income reachesaminimwn threshold level. For the 1989-90 income year the minimum threshold is $23,583. This amount will be increased in line with the consumer price index each year; or

(c) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS and be enrolled with details of their exempt status being recorded by the institution for subsequent reporting to the Department of Employment, Education and Training.

All enrolling students mustcomplete aPayment Options fonn selecting one of the above three options. Re-enrolling students will automatically maintain their elected payment option. Students must complete a new Payment Options fonn if they change courses or wish to change their payment option.

SCHOLARSIDP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS

Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of fmancial assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Statement of Charges Payable form together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be paid by the sponsor. Sponsors must provide a separate voucher warrant or letter for each student sponsored.

LOANS

Stu4ents who do not have sufficient funds to pay charges should seek a loan from their bank, building society, credit union or other financial institution. Applications for a loan from the Student Loan Fund should bemade to Mr. J. Birch, Student Administration Office. Arrangements should be made well in advance to avoid the risk of a late charge.

REFUND OF CHARGES

A refund of the General Services Charge paid on enrohnent or part thereof will be made when the student notifies the Student and Faculty Administration Office of a complete withdrawal from studies by the following dates.

Notification on or before 30 March 1990 100% refund.

Notification on or before 8 June 1990

After 8 June 1990

50% refund (e",c1uding Union Entrance charge)

No refund.

A refund cheque will be mailed to a student or if applicable a sponsor. Any change of address must be advised.

A refund will not be made before 31 March 1990.

viii

Campus Traffic and Parking' Persons wishing to bring motor vehicles (including motor cycles) on the campus are required to complete a parkinS regiSll'8tion form f« vehicle. Completed forms must be lodged wi~ Ibe Auendant (P Office located off the foyer of the OreatHaiL AU persons must~ with the University's Traffic and ParkingRegulatlons including in approved parking areas, complying wilb road signs and notex 35 k.p.h. on the campus.

If the Manager, Buildings and Grounds. after arr~iDg -Ibe: person period of seven days in which to sulmit a wriuen stiuetDent is sati,n that any person is in breach of Regulations. he may:

(a) warn the person against committing·any lurtber breach; or

(b) impose a fine; or

(c) refer the matter to the Vice-OuutceUor.

The range offines which may be imposed inrespectofvarlouscac.egor· of breach include:·

A student failing to notify the registered number of a vehicle broughton to the campus Parking in areas not set aside for parking. Parking in special designated parking areas ' without a parking pennit for thlll area, Driving offences - including speedins:.d dangerous driving

Failing to stop when signalled to do so by an Attendant (patrol)

Refusing to give information to an Attendant (Patrol)

Failing to obey the directions of an Attendant (patrol)

$[0 $[0

$15

$30

$30

$30

$30

The Traffic and Parking Regulations are stated in (Ull in Ibe Cal Volwne 1.

Geology Subject Descriptions GEOLlOI THE ENVIRONMENT 6cp

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and field excursions. The course is repeated in both semesters.

Examination One 3 hour paper, assignments arid laboratory practical'

Content

Alecture, field and practical course which examines in the widest context the evolution of our planet and man's environment Specific topics are the Earth in space; evolution and dynamics of the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere, hydrosphere, biosphere and man; the impact of climatic change; mineral resources and society.

Tex1s

Consult lecturers concerned

GEOLl02 EARTH MATERIALS 6cp Prerequisite /Corequisite GEOLlOl The Environment

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and excursions

Exmnination One 3 hour paper, assignments and practical examinations.

Content

A course integrating geological materials and processes within a plate tectonic framework. Magmatism, depositional environments and surficial processes are discussed in terms of modem and ancient environments. Modification by burial, metamorphism and uplift, patterns of life in the past and mineral and energy ~sources are presented.

Tex1S

Clark, J.F. & Cook, B.I. (eds.)

P erspectilles of the Earth (Australian Academy of Science, 1983: Tien Wah Press)

Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans, 1987)

Whitten, D.G.A.

A Dictionary o/Geology lstedn (Penguin)

GEOL201 MINERALOGY

~rerequisite 1990 Geology I

prerequisite 1991 GEOL102

'Corequisite GEOL202

6cp

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, PIacticals and excursions

Bramination One 3 hour paper and practical examinations. Itontenl

A basic course in crystallography. optical mineralogy and rock. forming minerals.

TexiS

Gribble, C.D. and Hall, A.J.

A Practical Introduction to Optical Min£ralogy (Allen & Unwin, 1985)

GEOL202 PETROWGY

Prerequisite 1990 Geology I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOLl02

Corequisite GEOL201

3cp

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester, including lectures and practicals

Examination One 2 hour paper and practical examinations

An introduction to the petrography and petrology of igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary rocks.

Texts

Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans 1987)

Gribble, cn. & Hall, A.I. A Practical InJroduction To OpticalMiMralogy (Allen & Unwin, 1985)

Yardley, B.W.D. An Introduction to Metamorphic Petrology (Longmans, 1989)

GEOL203 PALAEOENVIRONMENTS

Prerequisite 1990 Geology I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOL102

6cp

Hours 6 hours perweekforone semester, including lectures and practicals

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations

Content

A course integrating ancient sedimentaIy environments with the evolution and morphology of ancient life, stratigraphic relationships and time. The course will be supported by field excursions in the local area

Texts

Consult lecturers concerned

GEOL204 STRUCTURAL AND RESOURCE GEOLOGY

Prerequisites 1990 GEOL201, GEOL202

Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202

Corequisite GEOL203

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

3cp

An integrated introduction to geological structures, principles of geological mapping, tectonics and economic resources.

43

SECfION FIVE

Texis

Park, R.G. Foundations of Structural Geology 2nd edn (Blackie. 1988)

McQay,K. The Mapping a/Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)

GEOL2OS GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 20S 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Geology I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOLI02

Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination By report

Con/en!

AnaIy sis of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin, igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation of reports and supporting tutorials.

Texts

McQay.K. The Mapping o/Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)

GEOL206 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 206 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Geology I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOL102

Corequisite (Advisory) GEOL204

Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week

Examination By assignment

Content

Mapping of metamorphosed shelf and trench sequences of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt, integration and presentation in a report.

Text

McOay,K. The Mapping of Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)

GEOL207 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 207 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Geology I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOLl02

Corequisite (Advisory) GEOL204

Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination By assignment

44

GEOLOGYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS S,g,Cf~IO~N~FIVE~~ ______________________________________________ ~~~QY~~~~~~~~ - GEOLOGY SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Content

Mapping and data integration in the Cobar Trough; structural and stratigraphic interpretation, relationship of sulphide rocks to structure and stratigraphy; presentation of results andinterpretation in report.

Texts

McOay,K. The Mapping of Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)

GEOL301 EARTH PROCESSES 1 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA

Prerequisites 1991 GEOL20l, GEOL202, GEOL203, GEOL204. Either GEOL205 and/or GEOL206 and/or GEOL207

Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations

Conlent

Geometrical analysis of multi pI y -deformed terrains; ductile shear zones, kinematic indicators and analysis.

Micropalaeontology and Evolutionary Palaeontology; Micropalaeontology, principles of taxonomy, quantitative methods; species concepts, genetics, evolution; selected evolutionary patterns from the palaeontological record.

Text

Park, R.G. Foundations of Structural Geology 2nd edn (Blackie, 1988)

GEOL303 EARTH MATERIALS 1 6cp Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA

Prerequisite 1991 GE0L201, GEOL202, GEOL203, GEOL204. Either GEOL205 and/or GEOL206 and/or GEOL207.

Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork.

Examination One 3 hour paper, class asSignments and practical examination.

Content

Petrology

petrology of igneous rocks in relation to the tectonic environment; petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; petrogenesis of sedimentary rocks.

Texts

,MacKenzie, W.S., Donaldson, C.H. & Guilford, C. Atlas of Igneous Rocks and their Textures (Longmans, 1982)

Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans, 1987)

Yardley, B.W.D. An Inlroduction to Metanwrphic Petrology (Longmans, 1989)

GEOL304 EARTH MATERIALS 2

Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA

Prerequisites 1991 GEOL20I, GEOL202 & GEOL203

6cp

Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and fieldwork

GEOL302 EARTH PROCESSES 2

Prerequisite GEOL301

ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical 6cp examination

Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork. Includes Geophysics given by visiting lectures during tenn and vacation times and practical Geophysics during vacation

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations

Content

Weathering

Content

Economic Geology

Fundamental criteria forthe formation and characteristics of the principal types of metallic and non-metallic are deposits; mineralogy and resource economics.

Geochronology and World Stratigraphy

Principles of age dating; regional geology of selected provinces of the world.

Texts The mechanisms and geochemistry of weathering withrelation~ Consult lecturers concerned palaeoclimates and their products,laterites, silcretes, ferricrete; ironstone and gossans, together with application of mineralogical techniques to their compositions. J GEOL305 EARTH RESOURCES l2cp Exploration Geophysics Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA

Geophysical techniques-theirinterpreta1ionandappIication~ Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202, GEOL203, petroleum and mining exploration, and hydrogeological an4 GEOL204 .

engineerlnginvestigations (undertakenasGE0248Xat Macqu COrequisites GEOL301, GEOL302 University)

TexIs Hours 6 lecture hours and 6 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork

Consult lecturers concerned Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations

Contenl

Sedimentology

Lithologic associations in relation to the depositional facies of their environment of formation with emphasis on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a depositional area and its sedimentary fill (basin analysis)

Coal Geology

Origin, distribution, classification and economic potential of coal.

Petroleum Geology

Origin, source, migration, entrapment and distribution of petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of its detection, evaluation and recovery.

Stratigraphic Methods

Stratification; stratigraphic breaks; facies changes; factors in Ii thostratigraphy (rockunits,Iithofacies, lithosomes); catastrophic stratigraphy. uniformitarianism and the processes of sedimentation;

stratigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; correlation; stratigraphic palaeontology. Types of stratigraphic maps and sections; numerical analysis of data strings; numerical map analysis.

Texts

Consult lecturers concerned

GEOL306 APPLIED GEOLOGY 12cp Prerequisite 1990 Geology IIA

Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202. GEOL203, GEOl204

Corequisites GE0L301, GE0L303

Hours 6 lecture hours and 6 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork.

Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examination.

Content

Economic and Exploration Geology

Source, transport and precipitation of are minerals; sulphide mineralogy, wallrock alteration; ore-fonning fluids; sulphur. oxygen and lead isotopes in ore mineral genesis; fluid inclusions; geochemical environments; dispersion of metals; geochemical exploration.

Crustal Evolution

Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains in Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modem tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth throughout geological time.

Metamorphic Petrology

Interpretation of textures of rocks formed during prograde metamorphism, ductile shearing and accretion-subduction; processes involved in the production of grain shapes, intergranular and intragranular features.

Texts Consult lecturers concerned

45

SECTIONFIVE

Mathematics Subject Descriptions Level 100 Mathematics Semester Subjects

The usual route for a major study of Mathematics beyond first year starts with MATH102 in first semester, followed by MATH103 in second semester. However, entry at this point requires an adequate level of knowledge and skill. At the time of writing. the minimum level is indicated by a mark of at least 110 out of 150 in 3--unit Mathematics at the New S6uth Wales HSC examination.

Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill must start with MATHlOl in first semester, followed by MATH102. which is repeated in the second semester. nus combination allows entry to just four of the sixteen Level 200 subjects in Mathematics. Such a student could take MA THI 03 in alateryear to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects.

Note MATIH01 is not appropriate for a student who has performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATH102/103.

MATHIOI MATHEMATICS 101 6cp

Prerequisites See advisory prerequisites

Hours 6 hours per week of workshops and tutorials in first semester

Examination One 3 hour paper

Content

Elementary algebra. The Binomial theorem. Elementary calculus. The ideas of convergence (including finding roots). Vector geometry, row reduction of equations. Proof by induction. A brief introduction to complex numbers.

Text University of Newcast Ie Mathematics 101 Worksheet Book (1990)

References

JOMson, R.M. Calculus (Ellis Horwood, 1987)

Ash, C. and Ash, R.B. The Calculus Tutoring Book (IEEE Press, 1987)

Students taking both MATHI 01 and MA THI 02 should also note the text and references for MA TIll 02.

MATHl02 MATHEMATICSI02 6cp

Prerequisite Either a satisfactory performance in 3 unit Mathematics at theNSW Higher School Certificateorequivalent orMATHlO1.

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week in first semester. The subject is repeated in second semester.

Examination One 3--hour paper.

Content

Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Differential equations. An introduction to the calculus of functions of two variables. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors. 46

MATIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONs ~SE!l!CTdJ'IO,,"N"!.!'FJl'VE(!L ______________________ JMA\lA1HEMA'!!!!!lM1l:TI!I[l;CS~Sl.!U1!B1Elljl:CTTIDl!ES~CRJP!!!!;'ITI!lOl!N§S

Texts University of Newcastle Mathematics 1 Tutorial Not(!J (1990)

Waitelll, R.F.C. & Wehrl1ahn, K. Calculus /2nd edn (Carslaw, 1989)

References

Ayres, F. Calculus (Schaum, 1974)

Examination One 2 hour paper at the end of each semester.

Content

Selected parts of MATH102 and MATH103, covering linear algebra, some abstract algebra. and some elements of real analysis. TIlls is a conversion course available only to students who need W upgrade from Mathematics IS.

MATH201 MULTlVARlABLE CALCULUS :kp Edwards, C.H. & Penney, D.E. Prerequisites Mathematics I or both MATHI 01 and MA THI 02,

Calculus and Analytical Geometry (Prentice-Hall, 1982) or both MATHI02 and MATHI03.

Anton, H. Elemenlary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987)

Farrand, S. & Poxton, N.J. Calculus (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984)

Stein, S.K. CalculusandAnalytical Geometry3rd edn (McGraw-1982)

MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103

Prerequisite MATHI02

Hours 4 lecture hOllIS and 2 tutorial hours per week for seco semester.

Examination One 3 hour paper.

Conlent

Binomial theorem. Complex numbers. Numerical mathemati and computing. Vector geometry and linear algebra: ve spaces,linear maps. Convergence of sequences and series. Alge of limits. An introduction to statistics: exploratory data analys' uncertainty and random variation, probability, use ofMINIT

Texts University of Newcastle Mathematics I Tutorial Not (1990)

Freedman, D., Pisani, R. & Purves, R. Statistics (Norton 1978)

Giles, J.R Real Analysis: An Introductory Course (Lecture notes' Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.6)

JOMson, RS. & Vinson, T.O. Elemenlary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace Jovanovi 1987)

Chapman, C.RJ. Introduction to Mathematical Analysis Keegan Paul, 1973)

Brisley, W. Notes for Linear Algebra (Lecture notes in Mathern University of Newcastle, No.5)

MATHl99 TRANSITION MATHEMATICS

Prerequisite Mathematics IS

Hours 3 hours per week of lectures and tutorials, throughout the year.

HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem. Line integrals,

Multipleand surface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems.

References

Adams, R.A. Calculus of Several Variables (Addison Wesley, 1987)

Courant,R.

Differential and Integral Calculus Vol.li (Wiley, 1968)

Greenberg, M.D. AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Prentice Hall,1988)

Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, (988)

Kreyszig, E.

AdvancedEngineering Mathematics6th edn (Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)

Piskunov, N.

Differential and Integral Calculus VoLl and IT 2nd edn (Mir.1981)

Spiegel, M.R Theory and Problems of Advanced Calculus (Schaum, 1974

MATH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1

:kp

Prerequisites MA TH201 or both MATHI0} and MA THI 02 or both MA THI02 and MA THI 03.

Corequisite MATH203

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper.

COnlent

Orthogonality, Sturm-Liouville systems and generalisations, Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of Variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat! diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson)

References

Churchill, R.V. & Brown, J.W.

Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems (McGraw-Hill (978)

Greenberg, M.D. AdvancedEngineeringMathematics(PrenticeHall,1988)

Grossman, S.1. & Derrick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, 1988)

Kreyszig, E.

AdvancedEngineeringMathematics6th edn (Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)

MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1

:kp

Prerequisites MATIl201 orbothMATH101 and MATHI02 or both MATHl02 and MATH\03.

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 3 hour paper.

Conlent

Linear differential equations with constant coefficients, linear differential equations - general case, series solutions _ special functions, Laplace transforms, applications.

References

Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima, RC. Elementary Dijferenlial Equations and BountUuy Value Problems (W'tley, 1986)

Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, 1988)

Kreyszig, E.

Advanced Engineering Mathematics 6th edn (paperback, Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)

Sanchez, D.A., Allen, RC. & Kyner, W.T.

Differential Equations 2nd edn (Addison Wesley,1988)

MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisites 1991 MATHI02 and MATIII03

Hours 2 hours per week: for one semester

Examination One 2-bour paper.

Content

:kp

Functions, one-ta-one and inverses. Umits of functions, algebra of limits. Continuity, algebra of continuous functions. Properties of continuous functions, intermediate value and compactness properties, uniform continuity. Differentiation, algebra of deriVatives, Rolle and Mean Value Theorem, inverse functions, Taylor's Theorem, de I'HOpital's rule. Integration, the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Improper integmls.

47

SECfION FIVE

Text

Giles, I.R. Real Analysis: a introductory course (Lecture Notes in Mathematics. University of Newcastle, No.6)

References

Binmore, K.G. MatMmaticalAnalysis (CUP. 1985)

Chapham, C.R.I. IntroductiontoMathematicaIAnalysis(Routledge&Kegan Paul,1973)

Clark, C.w. Elemenlary Mathematical Analysis C'N adsworth-Brooks, 1982)

Spirak, H. Calculus (Benjamin, 1967)

MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES 3cp

Prerequisite 1990 Mathematics 1

Prerequisite 1991 MATH204

Hours 2 hours per weekfor one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Normed linear spaces. Euclidean spaces, convergence. Finite dimensional normed linearspaces, convergence. Function spaces, convergence. First theorem on uniform convergence. Sequence spaces, convergence. Metric spaces. Completeness in Euclidean, finite dimensional andfunclion spaces. Equivalent norms. Cluster points and closed sets. Relation of "closed"with "complete". Closure. Fixed Point Theorem. Continuity. Sequential compactness, approximation properties.

Texl

Giles, J.R. Introduction to the Analysis of Metric Spaces (CUP, 1989)

References

Bartle, RG. The Elements of Real Analysis (Wiley, 1976)

Giles,l.R Real Analysis: An Introductory Course (Lecture Notes in Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.6)

Goldberg, R.R. Methods of Real Analysis (Ginn Blaisdell,1964)

Simmons, G.F. Imroduction to T opologyand ModernAnalysis (McGraw­Hill,1963)

White, A.J. Real Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1968)

MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 3cp

Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics I or MATHlO2/103; 1991 MATHl02/\03

Corequisite 1990-1991 MATH201

48

MA TI-lEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar forms, geometry of the complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions, mapping theory ,limits and continuity. Differentiation, the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, exponential,logarithmic, trigonometric and hyperbolic functions. Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra

References

Churchill, RV., Brown, 1.W. & Verhey, R.F. Complex VariablesandApplications(McGraw-Hill,1984)

Grove, B.A. & Ladas, G. Introduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin, 1974)

Kreysig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979)

Levinson, N. & Redheffer, RM. Complex Variables (Holden-Day, 1970)

O'Neill, P.V. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983)

Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGraw­Hill,1964)

Tall, D.O. Functions of a Complex Variable I and /I (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970)

MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisite 1991 MATH206

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

3cp

Taylorand Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, evaluation of some real integrals and series, the Argument Principle and Rouche's Theorem. Conformal mapping and applications. Further examination of multivaluedfunctions; branch cuts, Riemann surfaces.

References

Churchill, R.V., Brown, l.W. & Verhey, R.F. ComplexVariablesandApplications(McGraw-Hill,1984)

Grove, B.A. & Ladas, G. Introduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin; 1974)

Kreysig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979)

Levinson, N. & Redheffer, RM. Complex Variables (Holden~Day, 1970)

SECTION FIVE

O'Neill, P.V. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983)

Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGraw­Hill,1964)

Tall, D.O. Functions ola Complex Variable I and II (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970)

MATH208 LINEAR ALGEBRA I 3cp

Prerequisites Mathematics I or MA THI 02/1 03 or (MA 1111 01/ 102 plus Computer Science I)

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Vector spaces and subs paces, Linear Maps, Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Diagonalisation, Difference equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt process. Orthogonal, unitary, hennitian and normal matrices.

References:

Anton, H. Elementary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987)

Bloom,D.M. Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979)

Brisley, W. A Basisfor Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973)

Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. Elementary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987)

lipschutz, S. Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974)

Roman,S. An Introduction to Linear Algebra (Saunders, 1985)

Rones, C. & Anton, H. Applications of Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1979)

MATH209 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisites MATH102/l03 andMATH208

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper.

Contem

3cp

Upper triangular matrices, orthogonal diagonalization. Characteristic and minimum polynomials, Cayley-Hamilton theorem. Jordan fonn, rational form. Linearisometries. DUality. Bilinear and quadratic forms.

References

Anton, H. Elementary Linear Algebra 5th cdn (Wiley, 1987)

Bloom,D.M. Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979)

MA 1HEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Brisley, W. A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973)

Lipschutz, S. Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974)

Nering. E.D. Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory (Wiley, 1964)

MATH210 GEOMETRY 1

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisite MA TH208

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examinations One 2 hour paper.

Content

An introduction to EUclidean and non-Euclidean geometry.

Text and References

To be advised

MATH211 GROUP THEORY

Prerequisite Maths I or MATH102/l03

/Jours 2 hours per week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

3cp

3cp

Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups. groups of lineartransf onnations and matrices, isometries, symmetry groups of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems, correspondence theorem. Orbits, stabilisers, and theirapplications to theBumside­Potya counting procedure.

Text

Ledermann, W. Introduction to Group Theory (Longman,1976)

References

Baumslag, B. & Chandler, B. Group Theory (Schaum, 1968)

Budden, F.J. The Fascination of Groups (CUP,1972)

Gardiner, C.F. A First Course in Group Theory (Springer, 1980)

Herstein, IN. Topics in Algebra 2nd edn (Wiley, 1975)

Weyl,H. Symmetry (Princeton, 1952)

MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS

Prerequisites Mathematics 1 or MATH102/103 or (MATH101/l02 plus Computer Science 1)

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

3cp

49

SECTION FIVE

Conlenl

An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics of current interest: Graphs, trees, relations, elements of set theory and logic; induction, counting, and recurrence equations; basic combinatorics.

Text

Ross, K.A. & Wright, C.R.B. Discrete Mathematics 2nd edn (Prentice Hall, 1988)

References

Alagar, V.S. Fundmnentals of Computing (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Grimaldi, R.P. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics (Addison Wesley, 1985)

Kalmanson, K. An Inlroduction to Discrete Mathematics and Us Applications (Addison Wesley. 1986)

Dierker, P,F. & Voxman, W.L. Discrete Mathematics (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986)

MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 3cp

Prerequisites Mathematics I or MATHI02/l03

HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated beginning with an analysis of the non-mathematical origin of the problem, the formulation of the mathematical model, solution of the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject.

References

Andrews, J.G. & McClone, RR. Mathematical Modelling (Butterworth, 1976)

Bender, E.A. Anfntroduction toMathematicalModelling (Wiley, 1978)

Boyce, W.E. (ed.) Case Studies in Mathematical Modelling (Pitman, 1981)

Dym, C.L. & Ivey, E.S. Principles of Mathematical Modelling (Academic, 1980)

Habennan, R. Mathematical Models (Prentice Hall, 1977)

Kemeny, J.G. & Snell, J.L. Mathematical Models in Social Sciences (Blaisdell, 1963)

LighthiU, I. Newer Uses of Mathematics (Penguin, 1980)

Noble,B. Applications of Undergraduate Mathematics in Engineering (M.A.A./Collier-Macmillan, 1967)

Smith,I.M. Mathematical Ideas in Biology (Cambridge, 1971)

50

MArnEMAT1CS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~~ECTI"""O",N"FlVE"-""-_____________________ ~MA~J:TIIEMA~~!T1!fCS~S'!JUIIlBJ".!E~CT~D:>IE~Si!:CRIP;!!lI']TI~O:>IN~S

Smith,J.M. Models in Ecology (Cambridge, 1974)

lIfATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 3cp

prerequisites Mathematics I or MA THI02/103 or (MATIlI0l! 102 plus Computer Science I)

MATH214 MECHANICS 3cp Corerequisite MATH103 Prerequisites Mathematics I or MATH 1 02 and MATH103

Corequisite MATH203

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Exmnination One 2 hour paper

Content

Summary of vector algebra Velocity and accelerations. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Motion with variable mass.

References

Chorlton, F. Textbook of Dynamics (Van Nostrand, 1963)

Goodman, L.E. Dynamics (Blackie, 1963)

Marlon, J.B. Classical Dynamics (Academic, 1970)

Meirovitch, L. Methods of Analytical Dynamics (McGtaw-Hill, 1970)

See also references for MATH201, 202, 203.

MATH21S OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3cp

Prerequisites Mathematics I or MA TIlI02/103 or (MA TIll 01/ 102 plus Computer Science I)

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Contem

Operations research involves the application of quantitative methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving the operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequences of certain decision choices and to improve theeffecti veness ofthe system as a whole.

This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research whichhaveprovedsuccessfulinbusiness,economicsanddefence. These include such topics as network and transportation problems, project management, stock control and replacement theory.

References

Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. Introduction to Operations Research Techniques (Allyn and Bacon, 1978)

Hillier, F.S. & Liebennan, G.J. Introduction to Operations Research 3rd edn (Holden­Day, 1980)

Taha, H.A. Operations Research 4th edn (MacMillan, 1987)

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Sources of enor in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear equatioo.InterpolatiooandtheLagrangeinterpolatingpolynomial. Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration fonnulae. Numerical sOlution of ordinary differential equations - Runge-Kutta and predictor-correctormethods.Numerical solutionoflinearsystems of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made throughout the course.

Text Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D.

Numerical Analysis 3rd edn (Prindle, Weber & Schmidt, 1985)

eferences

Atkinson, K. E. An fnlroduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1984)

alfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. Progranuning in Standard Fortran 77 (Heinemann, 1986)

erney, W. & Kincaid, D. NumericaIMathematicsandComputing2ndedn(Brooks_ Cole, 1985)

per, D. & Clancy, M. Oh! Pascal! (Wiley, 1985)

Problem Solving with Structured fortran 77 (Benjamin, 1984 et seq.)

Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and Scientists (Benjamin,1983)

d, C.F. & Wheatly, P.O. Applied Nwnerical Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1984)

niversity of Newcastle Computing Centre Handbookfor VAXIVMS

niversity of Newcastle Computing Centre VAX-ll Fortran

LOGIC AND SET THEORY 6cp rerequisite Mathematics IIA. Topics K & L are recommended

not essential, but some maturity in tackling axiomatic systems required.

rerequisite 1991 MATH204 or MATH210 or MATH211

ours 3 hours per week for one semester

ina/ion One 2 hour paper

Contem

Set Theory: Elementary concepts, relations and functions. Partially and totally ordered sets. Similarity and equivalence. Axiom of choice, ZenneIo's postulate, Well-ordering theorem and Zorn's lemma. Cardinality. Cantor's theorem. SchrOder­Bernstein theorem.

Mathematical Logic: Axiomatic treatment of the propositional calculus. Deduction theorem. Completeness theorem. Quantification theory. Axiomatic treatment of the predicate calculus. First order theories. Models. Logical validity. G&lel's completeness theorem.

References

Crossley, J. et al.

What is Mathematical Logic? (Oxford, 1972)

Halmos, P.R.

Naive Set Theory (Springer 1974; Van Nostrand, 1960)

Hofstadter, D.R

Godel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid (Penguin, 1981)

Kline, M. The Loss of Certainty (Oxford, 1980)

Lipschutz, S.

Set Theory and Related Topics (Schaum, 1964)

Margaris, A. First Order MathemaJical Logic (Blaisdell, 1967)

Mendelson, E. IntroductiontoMathematicaILogic2ndedn(VanNostrand, 1979, papewack)

MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND RELATIVITY

Prerequisite Topic CO

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Covariant and contravariant vectors, general systems of coordinates. Covariant differentiation, differential operators in general coordinates. Riemannian geometry, metric, curvature, geodesics. Applications of the tensor calculus to the theory of elasticity, dynamics, electromagnetic field theory, and Einstein' s theory of gravitation.

References

Abram,I. Tensor Calculus through Differential Geometry (Butterworths, 1965)

Landau, L.D. & Lifshitz, H.M. The Classical Theory of Fields (pergamon, 1962)

Lichnerowicz, A. Elemems of Tensor Calculus (Methuen, 1962)

Tyldesley, I.R. An Imroduction to Tensor Analysis (Longman, 1975)

51

SECfION FIVE

Willmore, T.J. An InJroduction to DifferenJial Geometry (Oxford, 1972)

MATH303 V ARIA TIONAL METHODS AND 6cp INTEGRAL EQUATIONS

Prerequisite 1990 Topic CO

Prerequisites 1991 MATH 201, MAnI203 and MAnI204

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ConJenJ

Problems with fixed boundaries; Euler's equation, other governing equations and their solutions; parametric representation. Problems with movable boundaries: transversality condition; natural boundary conditions; discontinuous solutions; cornerconditions. Problems with constraints. Isoperimetric problems. Direct methods. Fredholm's equation; Volterra's equation; existence and uniqueness theorems; method of successive approximations; other methods of solution. Fredholm's equation with degencrate kernels and its solutions.

References

Arthurs. A. M. ComplemenJary Variational PrincipLes (Pergamon, 1964)

Chambers, L.G. lnJegral Equations: A Short Course (International, 1976)

Elsgolc, L.B. CalcuLus of Variations (Pergamon, 1963)

Kanwal, RP. Linear Integral Equations (Academic, 1971)

Weinstock, R. Calculus of Variations (McGraw-Hill, 1952)

MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2

Prerequisites Topics CO & D

6cp

Prerequisites 1991 MA TH201, MATH203, MATH204 &MATH 208

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ConJenl

Linear systems with constant coefficients, general solution and stability. Nonlinear systems, existence of solutions, dependence on initial conditions, properties of solutions. Gronwall's inequality, variation of parameters, and stability from linearisation. Liapunov' s method for stability. Control theory for linear systems - controllability, observability and realisation. Applications will be studied throughout the coursc.

References

Arrowsmith, D.K. & Place, C.M. Ordinary DlfferenJial Equations (Chapman & Hall, 1982)

52

MATIIEMATICS SUBlEcr DESCRIPTIONS S~E~cr""[O",N",-,,Fl,-,VE"'-______________________ lMA~TIIlli!E~,M~A~Trr[CS~S~Ul!:BI1!['!lEcrIT1=D'!lE§<SCgRI!!IP!l'TI!I<:0,!,Nl§.S

Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S. DifferenJial Equations, Dynamical Systems and Line Algebra (Academic, 1974)

Jordan, D.W. & Smith, P. Nonlinear Ordinary DifferenJialEquations (Oxford, 1977

ConJenJ

Basic concepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number; ideal (non­viscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli

MATH30S PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2

6c equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation

Prerequisite Topic CO

Prequisites 1991 MATH 201, MATH 202 and MATH 204

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ContenJ

Firstorderequations: linearequations, Cauchy problems; gene solutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy's method characteristi compatible systems of equations; complete integrals; the metho of Charpit and Jacobi. Higher order equations: linear equatio with constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible equation second order equations with variable coefficients; characteristi hyperbolic, parabolic and elliptic equations. Special method separation of variables; integral transforms; Green's functio Applications in mathematical physics where appropriate.

References

Colton, D. Partial Differential Equations-an I nJroduction (Rando House, 1988)

Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. Methods of Mathematical Physics,Vo1.l1 Parti Di/feremial Equations (Interscience, 1%6)

Epstein, B. Partial DifferenJial Equations - An lntroducti (McGraw-Hill, 1%2)

Haack, W. & Wendland, W. Lectures on Partial and Phaffian Differential Equatio oPergamon, 1972)

Smith,M.G. InJroduction to the Theory ofP artial DifferenJial Equatio (VanNostrand, 1 %7)

Sneddon, LN. ElerMnlsofPartial DifferenJialEquations (McGraw-1957)

MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS

Prerequisites Topics B, CO

Prerequisites 1991 MATH201,MATH203, MATH204 MATH206

Corequisite 1991 MATH207

Ilours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for semester

Examination One 3 hour paper

theorem. Investigation of simpleirrotational inviscid flows; two­dimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially irrotational.

References

Batchelor, G.K. An lnJroduction to Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1967)

Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. EJemenJary Classical Hydrodynamics (Pergamon, 1967)

Curle, N. & Davies, H.J. Modern FluidDynamicsVols I &II (VanNostrand 1968, 1971)

Goldstein, S. (ed)

Modern DelleloprMnt in Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II (Dover, 1965)

Milne-Thompson, L.M. Theoretical Hydrodynamics (Macmillan, 1968)

Panton, R. Incompressible Flow (Wiley, 1984)

Paterson, A.R. A First Course in Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1983)

Robertson, J.H. Hydrodynamics in Theory andApplication (Prentice Hall, 1%5)

MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL 6cp MECHANICS

Prerequisite Topic CO

Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ContenJ

Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville theorem. Statistical mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density fiUctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein condensation; superconductivity.

Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of probability; development, solution and interpretation of Schrodinger's equations in one, two and three dimensions; degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure.

References

Croxton, C.A. Inlroductory Eigenphysics (Wiley, 1975)

Fong, P.

Elemenlary QuanlumMechanics (Addison Wesley, 1968)

Huang,K. Statistical Mechanics (Wiley, 1963)

Landau, LD. & Lifshitz, E.M. Statistical Physics oPergamon, 1968)

MATH308 GEOMETRY2

Not offered in 1990 - consult Department

Prerequisite 1990 Topic D

Prerequisite 1991 MATH211

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ConlenJ

6cp

Euclidean geometry: axiomatic and analytic approach, transformations, isometries, decomposition into plane reflections, inversions, quadratic geometry. Geometry of incidence: the real projective plane, invariance, projective tranSformation, conics, finite projective spaces.

References

Blumenthal, L.M. Studies in Geometry (Freeman, 1970)

Eves, H. A Survey of Geometry (Allyn & Bacon, 1972)

Gamer, L.B. An Outline of Projective Geometry (North Holland, 1981)

Greenberg, M.J. Euclidean and non-Euclidean GeorMtries 2nd edn (r"Ieeman, 1980)

MATH309 COMDINATORICS

Prerequisite 1990 Topic D

Prerequisite 1991 MATH208

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

ConJen!

6cp

Basic counting ideas. Combinatorial identities. Partitions. Recurrence relations. Generating functions. Polya methods and extensions. Equivalence of some "classical numbers". Construction of some designs and codes.

References

Liu, c.L. lnJroduction to Combinatorial Mathematics (McGraw­Hill, 1984)

Krisbnamurthy, V. Combinatorics: Theory and Applications (Wiley, 1986)

53

SECTION FIVE

Brualdi. R Introductory Combina.toric$ (North Holland, 1977)

Bogart, K.P. Introductory Combinatorics (Pitman, 1983)

Tucker, A. AppiiedCombinatorics (Wiley, 1984)

Street. A.P. & Wallis. W.D. Combinatorics: AFirstCourse(CharlesBabbageResearch Centre. 1982)

MATH310 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS

Prerequisites 1990 Topics B, CO, D. K. L

Prerequisites 1991 MATH 201 & MATH205

6cp

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Nonned linear spaces, finite dimensional spaces, inner product spaces. Linear mappings, continuity. topological and isometric isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Halm-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, adjoint operators and projection operators.

Texts

Giles, J.R. lnJroduclion to Analysis of Metric Spaces (CUP, 1987)

Giles.J.R. Introduction to Analysis ofNormed Linear Spaces (Univ. of Newcast1e Lecture Notes, 1988)

References

Bachman, G. & Narid, L. Functional Analysis (Academic, 1966)

Banach, S. Theorie des Operations Lineaires 2nd edn (Chelsea. 1988)

Brown, A.L. & Page, A. Elements of Functional Analysis (VanNostrand, 1970)

Jameson, GJ.O. Topology and Normed Spaces (Chapman-Hall,1974)

Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomio, S. V. Elements of the Theory of Functions and Functional Analysis Vol.! (Grayloch. 1957)

Kreysig, E. lntroductoryFunctionalAnalysiswithApplications(Wiley, 1978)

Liusternik, L.A. & Sobolev, UJ. Elements of Functional Analysis (Frederick Unger,1961)

Simmons, G.F. Introduction to TopologyandModernAnalysis (McGraw-

1Iill.1963)

Taylor. A.E. and Lay. D.C.

54

Introduction to Functional Analysis 2nd edn (Wiley, 1980)

MATIlEMATICS SUBJECi' DESCRIPTIONS ~~Ci'""IO><N,-,-"FIVE,-,-,,-_____________________ ---,MA=TIIEM~,,,,,,A,,T,-,I,,,CS,,-,,S,,U,,BJE,-,,,Ci'"-,D"ES"",C"RIP"",TI"O"N,,,S

Wilansky. A. gaplansley. I. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964) Fields and Rings (Chicago U.P.,1969)

Young,N. Stewart,l. An introduction to Hilbert Space (CUP, 1988) Galois Theory (Chapman & HaU, 1973)

MATH311 MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION

6cp MATH313 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (fHEORY). 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Topic L

Prerequisites 1991 MATH 204, MATH205, & MATlU06

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for 0

semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Algebras of sets, Borel sets. Measures, outermeasures, measurab sets, extension of measures, Lebesgue measure. Measurab functions, sequences of measurable functions, simple functio Integration, monotone convergence theorem, the relation betw Riemann and Lebesgue integrals. Lp-spaces, completeness.

References

BartJe. RG. The Elements of Integration (WJley,I966)

de Barra. G. Measure Theory and Integration (Ellis Horwood, 1981)

Halmos, P.R. Measure Theory (VanNostrand,1950)

Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S.V. Introductory Real Analysis (Prentice Hall, 1970)

MATH312 ALGEBRA

Prerequisites 1990 Topics D and K

Prerequisites 1991 MATlU08 and either MATH210 MATH2I1

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

In this topic the origin and solution of polynomial equations their relationships with classical geometrical problems such duplication of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. will further examine the relations between the roots coefficients of equations, relations which gave rise to Gal . theory and the theory of extension fields. Why equations degree 5 and higher cannot be solved by radicals, and what implications of this fact are for algebra and numerical analy . will be investigated.

References

Birkhoff. G.D. & MacLane, S. A Survey of Modern Algebra (Macmillan, 1953)

Edwards, H.M. Galois Theory (Springer. 1984)

Herstein, I.N. Topics in Algebra (Wiley, 1975)

Prerequisites 1990 Topics CO and D

Prerequisites 199] MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MA TH208. Programming ability (high-level language) is assumed.

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability oflioear marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference and finite-element methods of solution of partial differential equations. If time permits, other numerical analysis problems such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc will be treated.

Text

Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. Numerical Analysis 4th edn (Prindle,Weber & Schmidt.1989)

References

Atkinson, K.E. An Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1978)

Ames, W.P. Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations (Nelson. 1969)

Cohen, A.M. et al. Nunurical Analysis (McGraw-Hill, 1973)

Conte, S.D. & de Boor, C. Elementary Numerical Analysis 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill, 1980)

Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. & Moler, C.B. Computer Methods for Mathematical Computations (PrenticeHall.1977)

Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M. Analysis of Numerical Methods (Wiley,1966)

Lambert. J.D. & Wait. R. C omputalionalM etlwds inOrdinary DijferentialEquations (Wiley. 1973)

Mitchell. A.R. & Wait. R. The Finite Element Method in Partial Differential Equations (Wiley, 1977)

Pizer. S.M. & Wallace. V.L. To CompUleNumerically: ConceptsandSlrategies(ljttle, Brown. 1983)

Smith,G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Finite Difference Methods (Oxford, 1978)

MATH314 OPTIMIZATION

Prerequisites 1990 Topics CO, L

Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATII205

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

6cp

Many situations in Economics, Engineering, Experimental and Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The course is introduced by considering some simple examples of this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex functions underlying optimization arethendeveloped. The theory of linear programming, including Bland's anticyc1ing rule and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a common separation argument Ekeland's variational principle, descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for unconstrained problems form the final section of the course.

References

Cameron,N. Introduction to Linear and Convex Programming (Cambridge U.P .• 1985)

Greig,D.M. Optimization (Longman, 1980)

Hestenes, M.R. OptimizationTheory: TheFiniteDimensionalCase (Wiley, 1975)

Holmes, RB. A Course on Optimization and Best Approximation (Springer. 1972)

Luenberger, D.G. Optimization by Vector Space Methods (Wiley, 1969)

Luenberger, D.G. Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Programming (Addison-Wesley. 1973)

Ponstein, I. Approaches to the Theory of Optimization (Cambridge U.P .• 1980)

Roberts. R. W. & Vanberg. D.E. Convex Functions (Academic Press, 1973)

Werner, I. Optimization Theory and Applications (Vieweg, 1984)

55

SECfION FIVE

MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY 6cp

Prerequisites 1990 Topics A, CO

Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATH203,MATH 213

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This subject will show theuseof mathematical models toadvance the understanding of certain biological phenomena A number of biological situations will be investigated and students will be expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to obtain results which can be com pared with experimental findings.

References

Edelstein-Keshet, L. Mathl!matical Models in Biology (Random House, 1987)

Jones, D.S. & Sleeman, B.D. Differential Equations and Mathl!matical Biology (Allen & Unwin, 1983)

Murray, J.D. Mathl!matical Biology (Springer, 1989)

Segel, L.A. Modeling Dynamic PhI!rwmena inMolecularand Cellular Biology (Cambridge, 1984)

MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING 6cp

Enrolment constraint No more than 10 students will be allowed in anyone presentation of MATH316. The pennission of the presenting lecturer must be obtained before enrolment will be accepted.

Prerequisites 1990 A, CO and F

Prerequisites 1991 MA TH201, MA TH202, MATH203, MATH213 and MATH216

Programming ability (high lcvellanguage) is assumed.

Hours Nominally (see content) 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination Depending on course content either one 2 hour paper or one paper of less than 2 hours duration plus project.

Content

Several 'industrial' models will be examined, each commencing with the problem in non-rigorous verbal form, proceeding to a mathematical formulation, solving the latter and terminating with a discussion of the 'industrial' interpretation of the mathematical results. Here, 'industrial' is meant in the widest possible sense. Models may be taken from some or all of the following industries: finance, commerce, manufacturing, mining, exploralion, defence, scientific, travel and service.

At the same time small groupings of students will be involved in either a joumal-based or an industry-based project. Each group will present a written report on its project, and probably a seminar too.

The following reference list will be supplemented by other materials (e.g. journal references) as required.

56

MA1HEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS ~!?:Bcr""[",O"-N,,F\=VE,"--__________________________ -'P'l:H!1Y{!S;,[CS~~SU~BllJJlE!(cr'!..lD~ES~C~Rt1lPT!'!l[~O,!,N~S

References

Anderssen, RG. & de Hoog, F.R(eds) ThI! Application of Mathl!matics in Industry (Nijhoff, 1982)

Andrews, J.G. & McLone, R.R Mathl!matical Modelling (Butterworths, 1976)

Barton, N.G. (ed) Mathl!matics·in·lndustry Study Group (Proceedings of CSIRO Division of Mathematics and Statistics, 1985, 1988,1989)

Burghes, D.N. & Borrie, M.S. Modelling with Differential Equations (Ellis Horwood, 1981)

Crank, J. Free andMoving Boundary Problems(Oxford U.P., 1984)

Hill, J.M. One-dimensional Stefan problems: An Introduction (Longman, 1987)

K1amkin, M.S.(ed) Mathl!matical Modelling: Classroom notes in Appl' Mathl!matics (S.I.A.M., 1987)

Lin, c.c. & Segel, L.A. Mathl!matics applied to deterministic problems in t natural sciences (Macmillan, 1974)

Neunzert, H.(ed) Proceedings of thl! Second European Symposium Mathematics in Industry (Kluwer Academic, 1988)

Noble,B. Applications of Undergraduate Mathematics Engineering (Macmillan, 1967)

Tayler, A.B. Mathl!matical Models in Applied Mechanics (Claren Press, 1986)

Wan,F.Y.M. Mathl!matical ModelsandThI!ir Analysis(Harper & Row 1989)

MATH317 NUMBER THEORY

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisite 1990 Topic D or K

Prerequisites 1991 MATH102/103

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Divisibility and primes. Linear and qUadratic congruen quadratic reciprocity. Arithmetic functions and Mobius inversi Diophantine equations. Quadratic number fields.

References

Niven, I. & Zuckennan, H. An Introduction to the ThI!ory of Numbers (Wiley, 19

Ireland, K. & Rosen, M. A Classical Introduction to Modern Number ThI!ory (Springer, 1982)

Long, Calvin T. Elementary IntroductiontoNumber Theory (Heath,1982)

Physics SUbject Descriptions PHYSI0l PHYSICS 101 6cp

Advisory Prerequisites HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a result in the top 30% of the candidature or equivalent.

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

This is an introductOl)' course in physics concentrating primarily on the core topics of the HSC physics syllabus. The lecture course, each of 131ectures consists of three main strands:

(1) Mechanics

(2) Electromagnetism

(3) Waves, optics and thermal physics

There will also be 3 hours per week of laboratory and tutorial work

Texts

Serway and Faughn: College Physics 2nd International edn (Saunders College, 1989)

References

Student Study Guide which accompanies the above text

PHYSI02 PHYSICS 102 6cp

Prerequisites 1990 PHYSIOI or Advisory prerequisites of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a result inthe top 50% of the candidature or Mathematics IS.

Prerequisites 1991 PHYSI01 or Advisory prerequisites of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with aresult in the top 50% of the candidature or MATHI01)

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during the semester, and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content The lecture course consists of three principal strands, each of 13 lectures, being:

(1) Mechanics

(2) Electromagnetism

(3) Thermal, nuclear and quantum physics

There will also be 3 hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorial work

The subject is arigorous one, utilising calculus, and stressing the unifying principles in the development of the physical concepts. The syllabus provides for discussion of modem applications.

Texts

To be advised

References

Study guide to be advised

57

SECfION FIVE

PHYSI03 PHYSICS 103 6cp

Prerequisites Physics m or PHYSI02

Hours 6 hours per week fOf one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

The lecture course consists of three principal strands each of 13

lectures:

(1) Advanced mechanics and electromagnetism

(2) Waves and optics

(3) Thennal. atomic, and quantum physics

There will also be a total of 3 hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorials.

Thestrands will be matched lothe preceding strandsofPHYSl02, continuing with the rigorous development of basic physics.

Texts

As for PHYSI02

PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND 6cp ELECTROMAGNETISM

Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths I. Maths I may be replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI99) conversion subject. Students with grade of Credit or better in Physics m may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department

Prerequisites 1991 PHYS103 and MATHI03

Corequisites J990.1beseshouldincludeMATH2Dl Multivariable Calculus and such otller Mathematics 200 level subjects that will satisfy the prerequisites for any Physics 300 level subject.

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during semester. and one 3

hour paper at end of semester

Content

Basic principles of modem quantum mechanics. and electromagnetic theory. Laboratory. computational and tutorial

work. in these areas.

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PHYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL 6cp PHYSICS

Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths 1. Maths I may be replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI99) conversion subject. Students with a grade of Credit or better in Physics IB may be admitted with the approval of Head of

Department.

Prerequisites 1991 PHYSI03 and MATHI02

58

PHYSICSSUBlECfDESCRIPTIONS "SE",CfI=O=N-"FIVE=~ ________________________ -"P~HY=SI"CS=S"U",BlE=Cf=D~ES=CRIPTI=-",O",N=S

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 3 hour paper at end of semester

Content

PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS 6cp AND QUANTUM MECHANICS

Prerequisites 1990 Physics II. Mathematics IT (including topics CO. B and one of topics D and F)

. d d clasSl'cal mecham'cs and "" Prerequisites 1991 PHYS201. MATlUOl and MATH203 Thennal. phySlcs. a vance .... introduction to relativity theory

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC PHYSICS

Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths 1. Maths I may replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI conversion subject. Students with grade of Credit or better . PhysicsIB may beadmitted with approval of Head ofDepartm

Prerequisites 1991 PHYS201

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

Solid state physics and applications, atomic physics spectroscopy, optics and laser physics

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PHYS204 ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA or Physics IB, and Mathemati

lor Maths IS

Prerequisites 1991 PHYS I 02 and MA THI 02

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

Introductory course in analog and digital electroni microcomputer applications and signal processing princip with emphasis on laboratory and measurement applications.

Texis

To be advised

References

To be advised

Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone semester

Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination

Content

Mathematical methods. Quantum mechanics

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts

PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM 6cp AND ELECTRONICS

Prerequisites 1990 Physics II. Mathematics II (including topics CO, B and one of topics D and F)

PrerequisiJes 1991 PHYS201 and MATH201

Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/1utorial per week for one semester

Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination

Content

Electromagnetism

Electronics

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts.

PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND 6cp SOLID STATE PHYSICS

PrerequisiJe 1990 PHYS301

PrerequisiJes 1991 PHYS203 and PHYS30l

Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester

ExaminaJion Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination

Content

Atomic and molecular physics. Solid state physics

TexiS and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts

PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS 6cp AND RELATIVITY

PrerequisiJe 1990 Physics IT, Mathematics IT (including topics CO. B and one of topics D and F)

Prerequisites 1991 PHYS202 and MA TIl201

Hours 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester

Examination Examinations(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination

Content

Statistical physics

Relativity

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics II texts

PHYS30S NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND 6cp ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM

Prerequisite PHYS302

Hours 2lectures and4 hours laboratory/tutorial per weekforone semester

Exmnination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination

Content

Nuclear physics

Advanced Electromagnetism

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts

59

SECTION FIVE

Institute of Aviation AVIAIOI INTRODUCTORY AVIATION

SCIENCE Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

6cp

Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination

Content

The Fundamentals of Navigation, including; the form of the earth; the calculation of tracks and distances on the sphere and spheroid. spherical trigonometry; map projections, confonnality. scale and scale variation; navigational astronomy; the vector triangle.

An Introduction to Pressure Instruments: the International Standard Atmosphere; altimetry; the Altimeter, AS! and VSI, principles, construction, errors and use.

An Introduction to the Compass: earth's magnetism; the direct­reading magnetic compass, principles. construction, errors and use.

Introduction to meteorology.

Structure of the atmosphere.

Texts

Pallett, E.H.J. Aircraft instruments (Pitman, 1981) Visual FlighJ Guide (CAA 1989)

Bureau of Meteorology Manual of Meteorology - Gene.ral Meteorology Part 1 (AuSi Govt Pub Service, 1975)

Bureau of Meteorology Manual of Meteorology - Aviation Meteorology Part 2 (Aust Govt Pub Service, 1988)

References Air Navigation (H.O. Publication 216, US Government Printing Office 1983)

AVIAI02 INTRODUCTORY AVIATION ENGINEERING

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

6cp

Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, assignments and tutorials

Content

Aerodynamics: Basic fluid mechanics: conservation of mass, momentum and energy for an incompressible flow. Bernoulli's equation and the measurement of airspeed. The generation of lift. Pressure distributions on aerofoils. Trailing vortices, induced drag, lift-augmentation including wing-tip devices. Form drag and skin friction drag, the importance of Reynolds number. Boundary layers; laminar; transitional and turbulent. Separation and stall. Drag breakdown fortypical aircraft. Propellor analysis: one-dimensional theory and blade element theory. Discussion of general features of propellors.

Engines & Systems: Air standard thermodynamic cycles, actual two stroke and four stroke cycles, engine classification and

60

AVIATIONSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS eSE~CT~I~O~N~F~I~VE~ __________________________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~OQ~ AVIATION SUBJECT DESCRWTIONS

construction, efficiency measurement and calculalion, balancing Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, of reciprocating engines,lubrication and cooling systems, engine tutorials, seminars, and a final 2 hour examination instrumentation.

Texis

Engines & Systems

Bent, R.D., & McKinley, J.L Aircraft Powerplants 5th edn (McGraw-Hill, 1985)

AVIAI03 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS IN AVIATION

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

6cp

Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, seminars, assignments and a 2 hour examination

Content

Vision/Visuallllusions

Balance/Spatiallllusions

Memory

Learning and Skill Acquisition

Attention, Workload and Fatigue

Texts

Wiener, E.L. & Nagel, D.C. (eds) Hwnan Factors in Aviation (Academic Press, 1988)

References

Dhenin, J. (ed) AviationMedicine.. Physiology and Human Factors Vol 1 (1978)

Roscoe. S.N. Aviation Psychology (Iowa State Univ. Press,1980)

AVIAI04 INTRODUCTORY AVIATION 6cp MANAGEMENT

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination

Content

(a) Introduction to Computing: HardwareandsoftwarerelevaD to aviation; aircraft ·based monitoring and control systems; ground­based administration.

(b) Aviation Law: Introductory concepts; Tort law; Contrad law; Aviation techniques.

Texts

Curtin, Dennis P ApplicationSoftware with Wordstar, Twinll-2-3, andB III Plus (Supplied with a disk pack of software, Prenti HalI,1988)

AVIAIOS AVIATION SCIENCE

Prerequisite AVIA101

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Content

(a) Navigation and Navigation Instruments

Navigation: position lines and fixes; air plot and track plot techniques; single-pilot visual navigation; the 1 in 60 rule; elements of flight planning; the point of no return and critical point; radio aids as an aid to pilot navigation

Radio Aids: ADF/NDB/VOR; basic principles, signal propagation, use, errors

Flight Instruments: priociplesof the gyroscope; the Dl, A 1 and tum and balance indicator, their construction. errors and Use; the remote reading compass;

(b) Meteorology: atmospheric and horizontal pressure; wind, humidity and thermodynamics; cloud, precipitation and icing; orographic effects; thunderstorms; tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts; jet streams; hazardous weather: windshear, microbursts and macrobursts.

Texts

Pallett, E.H.J. Aircraft instruments (Pitman. 1981) Visual FlighJ Guide (CAA)

References

Air Navigation (H.D. Publication 216, US Government Printing Office)

AVIAI06 AVIATION ENGINEERING

Prerequisite A VIA 1 02

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

6cp

Aerodynamics: Introduction to control and stability with emphasis on static stability, Longitudinal and static stability, effects of dihedral. Aircraft penonnance: climb, take-off and landing. Laboratory demonstrations of aerofoil and boundary layer characteristics, trailing vortices.

Engines and Systems: Fuel systems, electrical systems, SUpercharging, hydraulic power systems,landing gear, wheels, ~)'reS, brakes and flaps, airconditioning, oxygenand pressurization, lee rain and fire protection, automatic pilot systems.

Texts

Bent, R.D. & McKinley, J.L. Aircraft Powerplants 5th edn (McGraw Hill. 1985)

References

Anderson, J.D.

Introduction to Flight 3rd edn (1989)

Kcrmode, A.C. Mechanics of Flight 9th edn (1987)

MCCormick, B.W.

Aerodynamics, Aeronautics arul FlighJ Mechanics (1979)

AVIAI07 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE

Prerequisite A VIA 1 03

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

6cp

Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, assignments, tutorials and a 2 hour examination

ContenJ

(a) Stress, anxiety and arousal; judgement and decision-making; personality, attitudes; intelligence; leadership; emotion; flight phobia; displays and controls; communication.

(b) Hypoxia, decompression, hyperventilation; trapped gases and effects; acceleration and effects; circadian dysrhythmia; vision; hypothermia/hyperthmia; toxic substances and perfonnance.

Texts

Hawkins, Frank H

Human Factors in Flight (Gower, 1987)

References

Dhenin, J. (ed)

Aviation Medicine.. Physiology and Human Factors Voll (1978)

Roscoe, S.N.,

Aviation Psychology. (Iowa State U.P., 1980)

AVIAI08 A VIA TION MANAGEMENT 6cp Prerequisite AVIA104

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment including a final 2 hour examination

Contenl

Enterprise: Small Business success and failure

Organisation

Texis

Reynolds W., Savage W. & Williams, A. Your Own Business: APracticalGuide to Success (Nelson, 1989)

Jackson. J.H. & Musselman, K.A. Business: Contemporary ConceptsandPractices(Prentice HalI,1987)

AVIA201 A VIA TION METEOROLOGY, 6cp NAVIGATION AND INSTRUMENTS

Prerequisite AVIA105

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination

Content

(a) Navigation and Instruments, radio navigation techniques using conventional aids; ADF/NDB, VOR, DME,!LS, RADAR; navigation on the climb & descent; principles and errors of radio

61

SECfION FIVE

and radar aids; PNR's and CP's including off track alternates; en­route and high altitude charts; terminal area charts, approach and landing charts. SIDs; the machmeter.

(b) Upper level forecasting and flying: northern hemisphere climatology; local forecasting; aviation map analysis.

TaJ Aeronautical Information Publication (CAA)

A VIA202 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT AND 6cp JET AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE

Prerequisite AVIAI06

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Thermodynamics of a compressible, perfect gas. The effects of compressibility on lift: the Prandtl-Glavert equation, critical. Mach number and drag divergence Mach number. Shock stall. Transonic aerofoils. The reasons for sweepback. Supersonic flow: the Mach case, delta wings, wave drag and associated limitations or wing thickness. The arearuleleading edge separation and vartoc lift at low speeds.

AVIA203 HUMAN FACTORS IN AVIATION 6cp

Prerequisite AVIAI07

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour examination

Content

Personality and attitudes; judgement and decision making; cockpit design; workload, fatigue and vigilance; leadership; accident investigation and safety; recruitment and pilot selection; simulation.

Texts

Jensen, RS, (ed) A vialion Psychology (Gower Publishing Co, 1989)

References

Dhenin, J, (ed) AviationMedicine. Physiology and Human Factors Vol I (1978)

Roscoe, S.N. Aviation Psychology (Iowa State Uni. Pres,1980)

AVIA204 METEOROLOGY AND HIGH SPEEDIHIGH ALTITUDE NAVIGATION

Prerequisite A VIA201

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

6cp

Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour examination

Content

Flight planning; jet aircraft petfonnance, take off, climb, cruise, descent, diversion,landing; one-engine out and depressurization

62

A~T[ONSUBrnCTDESCR~ONS ~SE~CT~[O~N~A~VE~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A~V~[A~T~[O~N~s~UB~rn~CT~D~ES~CR~WT~[O~N~S

contingencies; fuel policy and stationary requirements; the multi. sector flight plan; the Point of No Return and Critical Point in nonnal and abnonnal operations: In-flight replanning.

Texts B727 Performance Manual (CAA)

Texis

Stepniewski, W.Z. & Keys, C.N. Rotary-Wing Aerodynamics (Dover, 1979)

A VIA302 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT 6cp OPERATIONS AND METEORO,LOGY

A VIA20S AERODYNAMICS, ENGINES AND AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS

6cp Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation ITA

Prerequisite A VIA202

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Basic types of gas turbine engines, and their thermodynamic analysis. The flow through turbines and compressors. Blade design and cooling. Elementary theory of combustion, combustor design. Reasons for bypass. Unducted, ultra-high bypass and turboprop engines. Engines for supersonic flight. Future development of propulsion systems.

Control surfaces; asymmetric flight; noise suppression; thnut reversal; fuel, lubrication, cooling, ignition, fire protection systems; turbo-prop operation; the B727-200; flight planning; performance and loading.

AVIA206 A VIA TION INSTRUCTION 6cp

Prerequisite A VIA203

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Prerequisite 1991 Diploma of Aviation Science including AVIA201

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Exmnination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final examination

Content

Comparative flight plarming. Investigative study of aircraft perfonnance, operational economics, route structure and flight planning. Climates of the world and implications for international aviation.

Texts

References

Worthington, G.D.P. Flight Planning( (Pitman, 1982) 8747 Performance Manual (Qantas, 1985)

Other Performance Manuals and Flight Planning Data as available.

Examination Progressiveassessmentbasedonseminars,exercises A VIA303 (including demonstrated instruction), assignments and a 1 hour

A VIA TION ENGINEERING AND SUPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS

6cp

examination

Content Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation IIA

Psychology of learning; evaluating instruction and learning; P·.,equ,'s,"e 1991 Di I f A 'at' S' 'I <Ii .' P oma 0 Vl Ion Clence mc u ng instructional methods; instructional designs; computers and A VIA204 instruction; simulation.

Text

Telfer, R & Biggs, J. The Psychology of Flight Training (Iowa State UniversilJ Press, 1988)

AVIA301 ADVANCED AVIATION ENGINEERING AND STRUCTURES

Prerequisite 1990 Aviation I1A

Prerequisite 1991 AVIA205

Diploma of Aviation Science includina

Diploma of Aviation Science inc1ud:iJ1B

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Mathematical approaches to aerodynamics.

Supersonic aerodynamics.

Materials in aircraft structures: aluminum alloys; steel alloys; composites.

Aeroelasticity and "flutter".

Problems of fatigue, degradation and age.

AVIA304 ADVANCED NAVIGATION AND METEOROLOGY

6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation IIA

Helicopter aerodynamics including aero-elasticity and otltff Prerequisite 1991 Diploma of Aviation Science including dynamic-aerodynamic interactions. Experiments on propellmt. A VIA302

rotors and stalling aerofoils. Student project in advance4 ~,OlU's 6 hours per week for one semester aerodynamics. Introduction to structures and properties d materials for aircraft application.

Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination

COnJenJ

Comparative climatology.

Implication for international flight planning and flying.

Localised hazardous climates: Europe; the Atlanticroutes; polar routes; Asia and the Pacific.

Investigative study of advanced navigation systems, present and projected.

Inertial, Omega, VLF, RNav, Loran, SatelliteSystems. Principles, accuracy. economics, use.

63

SECfION FIVE

Psychology Subject Descriptions PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 1 6<:p

Hours 5 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Three written laboratory reports.

Introductory Methodology and Statistics for Psychology.

Biological Foundations.

Perception and Learning.

Texts

General-anyrecentcomprehensivetext on General Psychology or Introduction to Psychology. The follOwing alternatives are recommended (others may be added later)

Myers, D.G. Psychology, 1st or 2nd edn (Worth, 1986 or 1989)

Krebs, D. and Blackman, R. P sychoJogy ,a first encounter (Harcourt BraceJ ov anovich. 1988)

For Statistics course

Howell, D.C. Fundamental Statistics for the Behnvioural Sciences 1 8t or 2nd edn (Duxbury, 1985 or 1989)

References To be advised

PSYCl02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 2 6cp

Prerequisite PSYCI01

Hours 5 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Three written laboratory reports.

Cognition.

Social Psychology.

Developmental Psychology.

Texts

General-as for PSYCI01.

For Social Psychology

Callan, V. Gallois, C. & Noller, P. Social Psychology (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986)

References To be advised

PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02.

Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.

ExaminLJ.tion One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.

64

PSYCHOLOGYSUruECTDESCRWTIONS S~E~Cf~IO~N~F~I~VEE-____________________________________________ ~PS~Y~C~H~O~L~OG~Y~S~U~ru~EC~T~D~ES~CRDYn~~~O~N~S

Content

Will cover

(i) a selection of topics in experimental design, parametric tests, introduction to analysis variance and related topics, and

il) a range of topics aimed at elucidating the anatomy and physiology of the brain. The unit will be accompanied by a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer~assisted statistical packages.

Texts To be advised

References To be advised

PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02

Corequisites PSYC201 , PSYC203

Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work

Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratOIJ exercises

Content

1ms subject will examine basic Processes in Psychology such perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and hu models may be considered.

The Cognition course will examine two contrasting approac to the study of human intelligence. It will do so within historical contexts of both areas and in doing so will explore strengths and limitations of the scientific method.

The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. following topics will becovered: structure of the auditory syste subjective dimensions of sound, sound localization, elemen aspects of speech perception.

Texis To be advised

References To be advised

PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND SOCIAL PROCESSES

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02

Corequisites PSYC201 , PSYC202

Hours 2hours per weekfor one semester together with labor work

Examination exercises

Content

This course will cover such topics as Social Cogniti Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes.

The Social Cognition course will continue from the study social behaviours in PSYCI02 and will examine the cogniti processes underlying these behaviours, focussing on attributi

for events and ourunderstanding of social situations, and attitude structure and change.

Text

Forgas, J.P. Interpersonal Behaviours (pergamon, 1985)

References

To be advised

PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02

Corequisites PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203

6cp

Hours 2 hours per weekf or one semester together with laboratory work

Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises

Content

This course examines the ways in which individuals differ through a study of such topics as models of personality, patterns of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences.

Abnormal Behaviour: It is intended that this course should introduce the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding of abnonnal behaviour.

The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of: (a) the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic categories of psychiatric disorder (c) the symptoms of the major psychoses (d) the symptoms of neurosis (e) approaches to mental health care.

Personality: The course will examine a number of prominent approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present material in seminar sessions from time to time.

Texl To be advised

References To be advised

PSYC205 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 1

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02.

Corequisites PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203.

6cp

Hours 2hours perweekforone semestertogetherwithlaboratory work

Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises

Content

This course explains the application of Psychological theories With reference to selected areas of human activity such as Human Sexuality, Sports Psychology, and Behaviour Management.

The Human Sexuality course will present some of the basic infonnation necessary for beginning to understand important

issues in human sexuality. The anatomy and physiology of sex as well as the cultural context of sexual behaviourwill be considered.

Sports Psychology involves the application of psychological theories and techniques to the maximisation of sporting perfonnance, and to the psychological well~being of athletes, at all skill levels. This lecture series covers operant and cognitive strategies for improving sporting performance, clinical inteIVention in sport~related crises, and psychological aspects of sport and competition for children and recreational groups.

Text

Martin, G., & Hrycaiko, D. (eds) Behaviour Modification and Coaching (C.c. Thomas, 1983)(On Rem"e)

Shea, J.D. Humnn Sexuality: Psychology lIB. 1989. A set of lecture notes prepared by Dr. Shea, will be available from the bookshop early in the Semester one.

PSYC206 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I

Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203

6cp

J lours 2 hours per week for one semester together with laboratory work

Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises

ContenJ

This course explains the application of Psychological theories with r~ference to selected areas of human concern such as human neuropsychological disturbance, and the effects of drugs on behaviour.

N europsychol ogy; It is intended that this course shouldintroduce the sttldent to some of the types of human neurological disturbance and their causes.

Students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of:

(a) infantile neurological dysfunctions and their catlses,

(b) childhood neurological dysfunctions and their causes,

(c) neurological dysfunctions of the elderly and their causes.

Drugs and Behaviour: Discussion will include questions about the classification of Psychoactive drugs, principles of drug actions, drug effects on psychological processes and behaviour, addiction, dependency, and adjunctive behaviotlr.

References To be advised

PSYC30I ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology ITA

Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201. PSYC202, PSYC203

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination One two and a half hour exam paper

6cp

65

SECfION FIVE

Content

Will cover (i) a selection of topics in experimental design, advanced parametric tests, introduction to analysis of covariance and factor

analysis, and

(ti) a range of topics aimed at eludicating the anatomy and physiology of the brain.

The subject will be accompanied by a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer-assisted statistical packages.

Texts

Howell, D.C. Statistical methods for psychology 2nd edn (Duxburg Press,(987)

References

Kandel, E.R. Principals o/neural science 2nd edn (Elsevier, 1985)

Marascuilo, L.A. & Levin, J.R. Multivariate statistics inthe social sciences: A researcher's guide. (Brooks/Cole, 1983)

Harris, R.J. A primer of multivariate statistics 2nd edn (Academic Press.(985)

PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT

Prerequ~ite 1990 Psychology IIA

Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203

Corequisite PSYC301

Hours 2 hours per week for the full year

6cp

ExaminaJion Submission of a written report containing introduction, methods, results and discussion not more than thirty pages in length due early October

Content

The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments, surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student will be supeIVised by an academic staff memberof the Department of Psychology. The list of research areas will be available at the begirming of the academic year. Students are advised that this subject is a prerequisite for entry into an Honours year in

Psychology.

References

Students are expected to read a wide range of current literature in the area chosen for the research project.

PSYC303 ADVANCED BASIC PROCESSES 1 6cp

Prerequisite 1990 Psychology ITA

Prerequisite 1991 PSYC201

Corequisite PSYC301

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

66

PSYCHOLOGYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS ~~Cf~IO~N~FI~VE~ ____________________________________________ ~P~S~Y~C~H~O~LOG~Y~S~U~BJE~CT~D~ES~C~RWT~~IO~N~S

Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report

Content

This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory programme which will run over 4-5 weeks.

References

Frisby, J. Seeing (Oxford Univ. Press, 1979)

Sekuler, R. & Blake, R. Perception. (Knopf, 1985)

Osofsky, J.D. Handbook of Infant Development 2nd &In. (Wiley, 1981)

PSYC304 ADVANCED BASIC PROCESSES 2 6cp

Prerequisile 1990 Psychology IIA

Prerequisite 1991 PSYC201

Corequisite PSYC301

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report

Content

This subject will extend the examination of basic processes covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by either a laboratory or workshop programme run over about 4-5

weeks.

References

pSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES 6cp

prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and DB

Prerequisites1991 PSYC201,PSYC202,PSYC203,PSYC204, pSYC 205, PSYC 206

Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination By a combination offonnal examination and essay and one laboratory report

Content

The topic will examine how both motivational and cross-cultural factors influence human behaviour and psychological processes. The unit will beaccompanied by a practicum which will high1ight one aspect of the coursc.

Texts

Petri, H.L. Motivation Theory and Research 2nd edn (Wadsworth, (986)

References

Triandis, H. Handbook of Cross-Cull ural Psychology. 6 Vols.(AUyn & Bacon, (980)

Other references will be given during the lecture series.

PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS 6cp IN PSYCHOLOGY 1

Prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and lIB

Prerequisitesl991 PSYC201, PSYC202. PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206

Aseriesofreadingswillberecommendedasthecourseprogresses Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304

/fours 4 hours per week for one semester

PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES

Prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and lIB

Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204,

PSYC205

Corequisites 1990 PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination One two andahalfhourexam paper,laboratory and workshop reports

Examination Assessment will be by a combination of formal examination and written reports from projects of the student's own design aimed to give experience in field work.

Content

This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test construction, and will introduce a range of psychological tests through practicum sessions in which training will be given in test administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of interviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and

Content \ ~ng will be given ininterviewing techniques, the construction ~ use of inteIView schedules and the interpretation of inteIView ~ponses. Video and lape recording will be used extensively.

This subject will look at a variety of topics examining individual psychological processes cultural psychology and organizationlf behaviour. The subject will be extended by laboratory and workshop material.

References

To be advised at the beginning of the academic year

Texts

Ke&s, J. Introduction 10 quantitalive psychology, (Wiley,1971)

1 References

~ "variety of references will be available throughout the ~ation of the course.

PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS 6cp IN PSYCHOLOGY 2

Prerequisites 1990 Psychology ITA and lIB

Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201 , PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206

Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination Assessment will be by a combination of fannal examination,essaysandwrittenreportsonthepracticalexperience.

Content

This course will examine a number of different areas in which Psychology is applied. It will examine behavioural health care with particular emphasis on community-based inteIVentions in establishing behavioural change. The application of psychological based programmes in eliciting behavioural modifications in developmentally disabled children will also be studied. Finally, the individual's self regulation will be studied with particular reference to biofeedback techniques. The unit will be complemented with some practical experience in applied settings.

Texts

King, N. & Remenyi, A. (eds) Health Care: A behaviouralapproach(Grune& Stratton, (986)

References

References will be made available throughout the duration of the course

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS)

24cp

Prerequisite 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I, Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology IlIA OR have a credit or above in Psychology IIIB.

Prerequisite 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I. Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have a credit or above in BOTH PSYC301 and PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in Level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 arenot compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.

!lours 12 hours per week for the full year

Examination To be advised

Content

PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, a choice of two units in biological or physiological psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attcndance

67

SECfION FIVE

and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 24cp (THESIS)

Prerequisite 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I, Psychology lIA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology rnA OR have a credit or above in Psychology mn. Prerequisite 1991 A completed BA or BSc. or tluee complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) including the subjects Psychology I. Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301. PSYC 302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have a credit or aboveinBOTHPSYC301 and PSYC302as well as two additional credits in Level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.

Corequisite PSYC401

Hours 12 hours per week for the full year

Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supervisorandbyanothermember,ormembersoftheDepartment.

Content

PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is a formal presentation of this research and must be in APA format. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be tluough official departmental channels.

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 16cp

Prerequisite 1990 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above

68

PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~",,,cr",,ICOOc.N,-,F,",IVE= ____________________ ---,C,,O,,MP~UTE,-,-,,,,,R-,S"cC",lE"N .... C"E"S~U'-"B'!'lE"'cr~D""ES~C"'RlPT~'!'IO"'N~S

in Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, Psychology IlIA, and Psychology lIm.

Prerequisite 1991 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalem of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above in Psychology I, Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302. PSYC303. PSYC304. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307. and PSYC308.

Hours 8 hours per week for the full year

Examination To be advised

Content

PSYC403 comprises one third of the final yearofthe BA (psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC403 consists of three seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice oft wo units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is some overlap with PSYC401.

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 32cp

Prerequisite 1990 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalem of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above in Psychology I, Psychology HA, Psychology lIB, Psychology llIA, and Psychology TIIB.

Prerequisite 1991 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalel1 of three full-time years of the degree, induding passes or abov in Psychology I, Psychology HA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302. PSYC303. PSYC304. PSYC305. PSYC30~ PSYC307. and PSYC308.

Corequisite PSYC403

Hours 16 hours per week for the full year

Examination Reports will be assessed by the supervisor and bJ another member, or members, ofthe Department. Placement wiB be assessed on the basis of supervisor's report and a student essay,

Content

PSYC404 comprises two-thirds of the final year of the BA (Psych) orBSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to erud in PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 ill the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists two equally-weighted sections: a piece of original empiri~ research. and aplacement. Theresearch project will besupervi by a member of the Psychology Department and must be in II applied area A report in APA format, of approximately twentJ

five pages, is required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. The placement component involves: introductory seminars on ethical and profeSSional issues; supervised experience in a community facility in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory and technique.

Texts

To be advised

References

To be advised

Computer Science Subject Descriptions COMPIOI COMPUTER SCIENCE I 12cp

Prerequisite. Entry to this subject by students other than those enrolledintheBCompScand BE(ComputerEngineering)degree programmes is limited by quota. See the Faculty Secretary for details.

Content

Introduction to the follOwing aspects of computer science: The design of algorithms. The theory of algorithms. How algorithms are executed as programmes by a computer. The functions of system software (compilers and operating systems). Applications of computers. Social issues raised by computers. An extensive introduction to programming Pascal and afunctional programming language.

COMP201 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 3cp

Prerequisite COMP101 or COMP102

Corequisite MA TH212

Content

Dasicdatastructuresareinvestigated. TopicscoveredwiUinclude a review of elementary data structures, an introduction to the concept of an abstract data type and the abstraction and implementation of data types selected from lists, stacks, queues, trees, graphs and sets.

COMP202 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 3cp

Prerequisite COMP203

Content

Provides basic introduction to the logical internal structure of computers and the implementation of computer arithmetic and number handling systems.

COMP203 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE

Prerequisite COMPIOI orCOMPI02

ContenJ

3cp

Thecourse is divided into two sections. Thefirst section provides an introduction to computerorgarusation and assembly language programming. Topics covered include data representation, computer structures, registers, addressing modes, instruction sets, subroutines and the use of stacks. The second section of the course is an introduction to operating system principles. Topics covered include process management synchronisation and resource allocation.

COMP204 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 3cp SEMANTICS

Prerequisite COMP205

Content

Examination of the major concepts which underlie modem programming languages. A variety of programming styles will be compared, including imperative, object-oriented, functional, and logic programming. Representative languages will be

69

SECfION FIVE

introduced to illustrate the concepts behind each style. Programming design issues such as data encapsulation, infonnationhiding, and inheritance will also be studied. Languages studied chosen from C, C++. Lisp, Modula-2, Pascal, Prolog, Scheme, Smalltalk, Ada

COMPlOS PROGRAMMING IN C

Prerequisite COMPIOI or COMPI 02

Content

3cp

C programming for those already proficient in Pascal. Elementary Unix system calls and interfaces to other languages such as Pascal and Assembly Language. Use of UNIX software system tools such as "make", "lint" and "indent".

COMPlO6 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 3cp

Prerequisite MA TH2I2

Content

An introduction to theoretical computer science, covering material in the areas of formal languages, automata theory and computability.

COMP241 COGNITIVE SCIENCE 6cp

Content

An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of models and metaphors of mind,language, knowledge and perception used by various disciplines and the potential applications of those models and metaphors by artificial intelligence researchers, computer scientists and engineers.

COMPJOI COMPILER DESIGN 6cp

Prerequisites COMP201, COMP203, COMP204and COMP206

Content

Introduction to the theory of grammars. Lexical analysers, parsing techniques, object code generation. Design of interpreters. Global and peephole optimisation. Runtime support, error management. Translator writing systems.

COMP302 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 6cp

Prerequisile COMPIOI or COMPI 02

Content

An introductory oveIView to Artificial Inte1ligence, covering some or all of the following topics: history of AI; game playing; knowledge representation; search techniques; natural language processing; expert systems; automatic deduction; theorem proving; computer vision; computer learning; philosophical, psychological, and social issues.

70

COMPVTERSCrnNCESUBJECTDESCR~0N! ~~cr~IO~N~AVE~~ ____________________________________________ ~G~E~OG~R~AP~HY~~S~VBlE~~CT~D~ES~C~Rg~~O~N~S

COMP303 COMPUTER NETWORKS

Prerequisite COMP202

6cp COMP307 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES

6cp

Content

Anintroduction 10 datacommunica1ionnetworks. Topicsinclude data transmission, transmission media., network protocols, lS~ OSl, public data networks. local area networks and distributed systems.

COMPJ04 DATABASE DESIGN

Prerequisite COMP201

Content

A basic introduction to database systems, with particularemphasia on relational database systems. Topics covered will include:basie concepts and tenninology, types of systems (hierarchic, relational, network, inverted list), data design, relational theory, relatiOnal algebra, relational calculus, data integrity!recovery, security, concurrency, distributed systems.

Prerequisite COMP201

Content

'[be subject comprises lectures in first semester plus a major assignment in second semester. After a brief explanation of the nature and life-cycle of large software systems, the software crisis which they have created, and the desirable properties of we1l-designed systems, the lectures explore the nature of stable systems in the natural world and in engineering and considerhow humans think about, remember and create complex systems. TIlls leads to the re-evaluation of the principles and techniques used in lheconstruction of major software systems, offering new insights into the concepts of modularity and hierarchical structure.

tOMP308 OPERATING SYSTEMS

Prerequisites COMP201 and COMP202

Content

6cp

COMPJOS ALGORITHM DESIGN Ar;D ANALYSIS

Prerequisite COMP206

6cp An introduction to operating system structure and design. The course begins with a review of process management and inter­process synchronisation, covered as part of the Assembly Language course. New topics covered include advanced

Content

Approaches to the design of computer algorithms with severi important examples. Analysis of algorithm perfonn~ computational complexity, NP-completeness.

COMP306 COMPUTER GRAPHICS

Prerequisites C0MP201, COMP205, MA TH208 andMA TH216

Content

This subject will cover advanced computer graphics topics w relevant mathematical and programming techniques and .. overview of graphics hardware design.

Topics include: Hardware devices for graphics output and inpul; geometrical transfonnations; homogeneous coordinates; plana: projections; c1ippingin 2D and3D modelling and objecthierarchf, standards - GKS, PHIGS; raster algorithms; antialiasing; regi(l filling; 3D shape representation; polygon meshes; parametric cubics. Hermite, Belier and B-splines; transforming CUIVes aol patches, hiddenlineremoval, hiddensutfaceremovalalgori~ shading and texture mapping; diffuse and specular reflecti~ colour modelling; growth models; fractals and particle systetm: animation techniques; advanced graphics hardware architectum: future trends in computer graphics.

synchronisation techniques, deadlock detection, memory management including virtual storage techniques, multiprocessing and file systems. The emphasis will be on practical operating systems. and where possible reference will be made to existing systems currently in use.

Geography Subject Descriptions GEOGIOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL 6cp

GEOGRAPHY

Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GE0G402

HOUTS 2hours lectures and 2hoursof practical work perweekfor one semester. A one-day excursion.

Examination Progressive assessment and one2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

An introduction to physical geography including meteorology and climate; theinfluence of geomorphic processeson landforms; weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historica1factors that influence plant distribution.

Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial photographs for landform analysis.

Texts

Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. Fundamentals of Physical Geography (Hutchinson papeIback, 1985)

GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HllMAN 6cp GEOGRAPHY

PrereqUisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOO l02are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GE00401 and GEOO402

Hours 2hourslecturesand 2hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one-day excursion.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

An introduction to human geography including cultural, population, economic, development and urban geography.

Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography. Texts

Haggett.P. Geography; amo<iernsynthesis, 3rdedn paperback (Harper & Row, 1983)

GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY

Prerequisite 1990 Geography I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOOIOI

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

6cp

71

SECTION FIVE

Content

An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical Geography. Study of cartographic, photographic and aerial photographic methods in geography.

GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 6<p

Prerequisite 1990 Geography I

Prerequisite 1991 GEOG102

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography: descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there will be an introduction to computer aided mapping and geographic infonnation systems.

GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND 6cp CLIMATOLOGY

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed onrainf orest for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field experience.

An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale including radiation and head budgets; precipitation processes; general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology.

Texts Attenborough, D.

Life on Earth (Fontana/Collins, 1981)

Pears, N. Basic Biogeography 2nd edn (Longman, 1985)

Linacre, E. & Hobbs, J. The Australian Climatic Environment (Wiley, 1983)

GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA 6cp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

Rocks and their weathering, structurallandfonns, soils, slope development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal processes and landfonns, glacial and periglacial processes and landforms.

72

GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTION.! !-!!,Bcr~[O"",N-,-F",O"UR"'--______________________ -,G"E"OG"",R"AP",H,-,Y"-"S"UBlE"""C"T __ D"ES"",C"RlPTI""",O"N",S

GEOG20S CONTEMPORARY AUSTRALIA & EAST ASIA

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

multivariate techniques, computer aided mapping and geographic infonnalion systems.

(JEOGJ03 Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the GEOGRAPHY OF ABORIGINAL

AUSTRALIA 6cp

end of the semester.

Content

Since the Second World War, there have been rapid changes hi Australia's economy, society and political life: this course wi)

consider some geographical aspects ofthese changes, emphasi~ the interaction of people and environment. The influence of geographica1loca1ion on living conditions (current and future) will be examined.

The contemporary economic and social geography of East Asia, concentrating on China and Japan. While population, agricultural, industrial and political changes since World War II are studie4 there is a special focus on Japan since the oil shocks of the 1970. and on China since the death of Mao Zedong. The contributiond geography to an explanation of events occurring during the course is a special focus.

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fi~ld work

Eiamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Con/ent

'Ibis course examines Aboriginal environments from the prehistoric evidence for settlement through two hundred years of European settlement to the present, and stresses issues such as basic Aboriginal needs and land rights.

GEOG 304 THE BIOSPHERE AND CONSERVATION

Prerequisite GEOG 203

6cp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 4 days fieldwork

GEOG206 SOCIO-ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the

~ end of the semester

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work ~ Con/ent

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper attij end of the semester.

Content

Anintroductorycourseinsocio-economicgeographywiths~

reference to issues in agricultural, industrial location and development geography.

Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A seminar presentation and a small herbarium collection are required of each student.

GEOGJOI ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY

Biological Conservation: An introduction to the subject, in which the importance of an ecologically~based approach is emphasised. Methods for the evaluation of plant and animal species populations and for environmental assessment are

6cp described and analysed.

Prerequisite 1990 Geography lIB

Prerequisites 1991 GEOGI01 & GEOG201

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. This course requires a 5 day field excursion

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Includes a five day field trip on aspects of climatology, geomorphology, and biogeography where field methods l1li

emphasised. Twelve hours of advanced statistics are included. support to field measurements. The field trip will be schedule.! between semesters or in the second semester break:.

Soils, processes of soil erosion, sediment transport and deposition in the context of the drainage basin; soil conservation issues and metltods.

TexJs

Kellman, M.C. Plant Geography. 2nd edn (Methuen, 1980)

Mowat, F. Woman in the Mists: The Story of Dian Fossey and the Mountain Gorillas of A/rica (Futura, 1989)

Morgan, RP.C. Soil Erosion and Conservation (Longman, 1986)

GEOG30S CLIMATIC PROBLEMS 6cp 6q Prerequisite 1990 Geography lIB GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN

HUMAN GEOGRAPHY

Prerequisite 1990 Geography ITA

Prerequisites 1991 GEOG102 & GEOG202

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment

Prerequisites 1991 GEOG203 Biogeography and Climatology or permission of Head of Department

Hours 4 hours per week for one scmester, 1 day fieldwork

8xamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Conlent COntent

Advanced methods appropriate to Human Geography. Me~ ·lntroduces methods include survey design, questionnaire construction, social analysilo

of establishing palaeoclimates in the

Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate manges over those periods. Describes anthropogenic impacts on climate, throughairpollution,onloca1,regionalandglobalsca1es.Evaluates near-future possible climate variations over the next century.

Recommended Reading

Bradley, R.S.

Quaternary Palaeoclimatology (Allen & Unwin, 1985)

GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA: 6<p AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied include; exploratory images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia before 1900; migration to the New World-population of Australia 1788 ~ 1981; urbanisation in Australia; agricultural land use 1788 to 1914.

GEOG307 THE HYDROSPHERE 6cp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

The course examines the distribution of waterin the environment. After brief consideration of snow, ice and the oceans, most attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the hydrologic cycle, catchments and runoff, and soil water.

Texts

Ward, R.C. Principles o/Hydrology, 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill, 1989)

GEOG308 BASIC NEEDS & PATTERNS OF INEQUALITY

Prerequisite 1990 Geography ITA

6cp

Prerequisite 1991 GEOG206 Socio~Economic Geography is a desirable prerequisite/corequisite for this course

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work

Examination One 2 hour paper plus field project report

Content

The course will consider major themes of Basic Needs, inequality and equity that have substantive geographical content, based on case studies from Australia and from diverse economic systems overseas. A field project will be an essential component of the course.

Texts

Smith,D.M. Geography,lnequalityand Society(Cambridge U .P., 1987)

73

SECTION FIVE

Information Science Subject Description INFOIOI INTRODUCTION TO

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 6cp

Hours 3 hours of lectures and 2 hours of tutorials per week for one semester

Content

Computers have made it possible to store and retrieve massive amounts of data. the "information age" is now a reality. This course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit the power of this new tool.

After completion of the subject students will understand how and why organisations build and use information systems, will be able to document information flow through particular systems, and will be able to use the microcomputer as a personal support tool.

The course provides a solid grounding in computers and their use. which today is important for all students, irrespective of the discipline which they are studying.

Topics covered include;

The evolution of computer hardware and software.

Systems and their characteristics, the components of an Information System (hardware, software, data and people). Examples of computer based Information Systems.

Problems which can/cannot be solved using computers. Types of infonnation systems, fonnal/infonnal, public/private. Types of problems, structured/unstructured.

The computer as a personal support tool, word-processing, spreadsheets, data base management

Systems Analysis, understanding and documenting information systems, structured analysis and design, dataflow diagrams, data dictionaries, modularity, infonnation hiding.

Theimportance of people in the information network, the social, organisational and personal implications of computer based information systems.

Extending the information network, the need for integration of data. Networks (LANs, WANs, etc), electronic mail, electronic data interchange.

Future trends, Decision Support, End User Computing, Expert Systems, SOL's, alternative development methodologies.

References

Behan, K. and Holmes, D. Understanding Information Technology (Prentice-Hall, 1986)

DeMarco, T. Structured Analysis and System Specification (Prentice­Hall,I978)

Gane, C. and Sarson, T. Structured Systems Analysis: Tools and Techniques (Prentice-Hall,I979)

Ingalsbe, L.

74

Business Applications Software for the IBM PC (Merrill, 1988)

INFORMATION SCIENCE SUBJECT DHSCRIPTI

Jackson, M.A. Principles of Programme Design (Academic Press, 197

Shelly, G Cashman, T., et al Computer Concepts with Microcomputer Applicatio (Boyd & Fraser, 1989)

Shore,B. Introduction to Computer Information Systems (H.R W 1988)

Szymanski, R., Syzmanski, D., et al Introduction to Computers and Information Syste (Merrill, 1988)

SECTION FIVE

Statistics Subject Descriptions [)elails of courses offered by the Department of Statistics can be obtained from the Departmental Secretary or from the Head of the Department.

STATIO! INTRODUCTORY STATJSTIC~ 6cp

Prerequisites This course does not assume knowledgeof calculus or matrix algebra

Hours 3 lecture hours, I laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester

Content

Introduction to the principles of study design, data analysis and interpretation; the statistical computing programme MINIT AB will be used extensively.

Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. Probability. Statistical inference:

. sampling distributions, confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means and proportions. Correlation and regression. Time series analysis. Chi-square tests for frequency tables.

Texts To be decided.

References

Freedman, D., Pisani, R. and Purvis, R. Statistics (Norton, 1978)

Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. MINrrAB Handbook 2nd edn (Duxbury, 1985)

Miller, R.B. MINrrAB Handbook/or Business and Economics (PWS­Kent, \988) MINrrABRe/erence Manual (1986)

Statistics Part of Mathematics 103

MA THI03 is the most advanced 100 level Mathematics subject and it has MATHI02as a prerequisite. The Statistics part is one quarter of the subject MA THI 03 and it involves 1 lecture hour per week and I tutorial hour per fortnight contact time.

The course will be offered in semester 2 in 1990 and in both semesters in subsequent years.

As students will be more familiar with University-level ·mathematical subjects and computing, the course will proceed faster than STATlot. Nevertheless several topics will not be covered in as much depth ,and regression, time series and chi­squared tests will not be included. The statistical computing programme MINITAB will be used extensively.

Content

Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. '.Randomization and sampling. Scales of measurement. Descriptive -.rtd exploratory data analysis. Statistical inference for sampling ; distributions related to the Normal distribution. Confidence ~tervals. Comparisons of means and proportions.

·Text To be advised

STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

References

Freedman, D., Pisani, R and Purvis, R. Statistics (Norton,1978)

Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. MlNrrAB Handbook 2nd edn (Duxbury, \985) MINrr AB Reference Manual (1986)

STAT201 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS 6cp

Prerequisite In 1990, Mathematics I and from 1991 either MA THI 03 or ST A Tl 01 Introductory Statistics and MATHI02 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATHI02)

Hours 3 lecture hours and Ilaboratory!tutorialhourperweekfor one semester

Content

Probability theory, random variables, probability distributions. Sampling distributions, parameter estimation, confidence intervals. Hypothesis testing, significance levels, power. t-, F­and chi-squared tests. Quality control.

Text

Larsen, R.J. and Marx, M.L. An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics and jts Applications 2nd edn (Prentice Hall, 1986).

STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS 6cp

Prerequisites In 1990, ST A T201 Mathematical Statistics and from 1991 STAT201 Mathematical Statistics or STATlot Introductory Statistics and MATH102 (or equivalent)

Hours 2 lecture hours, 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester

Simple linear and multiple regression. Linear models. Variable selection. Diagnostics. Regression approach to analysis of variance. Non-linear regression.

This course covers the practical and theoretical aspects of multiple regression analysis, including matrix derivations of parameters, the assumptions underlying normal linear models, confidence intervals and prediction, variable reduction methods, examination of the adequacy of models, analysis of variance and covariance, interaction tenus and statistical computer packages.

Texts To be advised

References

Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. Applied Regression Analysis (Wiley, 1981)

Daniel, C. and Wood, F.S. Fitting Equations to Data (Wiley, 1971)

Seber, G.A.F. Linear Regression Analysis (Wiley, 1977)

STAT203 QUEUES & SIMULATION 3cp

Prerequisites In 1990, Mathematics I or Mathematics IS and from 1991 MATHI02. FortheBSc. degreeSTAT204 would also have to be taken.This course covers topics specifically required for Computer Science but is also relevant fOT Statistics and other disciplines.

75

SEcrlON FIVE

Hours 21ecture/laboratory hours per week for one semester

Content

Queues. Random number generation. Simulation, including the use of SIMSCRIPT.

References

Morgan, B.l.T. Elements of Simulation (Chapman and Hall, 1984)

Ross, S. Stochastic Processes (Wiley, 1983)

STAT204 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS 3cp

Prerequisites In 1990, STA T20t Mathematical Statistics and from 1991 STAT20} Mathematical Statistics or STATIO} Introductory Statistics and MATHI02 (or equivalent).For the BSc. degree STAT 203 would also have to be taken.

Hours 21ecturellaboratory hours per week for one semester

Conlenl

Chi-square tests for goodness arfit and contingency tables. Rank tests. Robust methods of data analysis.

Text To be advised

STAT20S ENGINEERING STATISTICS 3cp

Prerequisite 1990 Mathematics 1

Prerequisite 1991 MATHI02.This subject is mainly taken by students in Mechanical or Industrial Engineering but is also available to other students.

HOUTS 2lecture/laboratory hours per week for one semester

Content

Basic probability theory and principles of statistical inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality control.

T ex! To be advised

References

Chatfield, C. Statistics for Technology 3rd edn (Chapman and Hall, 1983)

Guttman, I., Wilks, S.S. & Hunter J.S Introductory Engineering Statistics 3rd edn (Wiley, 1982)

STATJOI STATISTICAL INFERENCE 6cp

Prerequisites In 1990, Statistics II and from 1991 STAT201 Mathematical Statistics, STA 1'202 Regression Analysis and MA TH201 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MA TH201, i.e. multivariable calculus).

HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester

Content

Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data and this course is concerned with the theory and practice of that process. The main emphasis is on likelihood-based methods of estimation and hypothesis - testing, but other topics to be covered may include: special distributions, transfonned variables, some re-sampling and other computer-based techniques. 76

STATISTICS SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS

References

Kalbfleisch, J.G. Probability and StaJisticallnj'erence II (Springer, 1979)

Hogg, R.Y. and Craig, A.T. Introduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Collier MacMillan, 1978)

Silvey, S.D. Statistical Inference (Chapman and Hall, 1978)

Cox, D.R. and Hinkley, D.V. Theoretical Statistics (Chapman and Hall, 1974)

STATJ02 STUDY DESIGN

Prerequisite 1990 Statistics II

6cp

Prerequisites 1991 STATI01 Mathematical Statistics and ST A 1'202 Regression Analysis

HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester

Contenl

This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and non -experimental studies including surveys. The topics included to illustrate the principles of experimental design are completely randornised designs, randomised block designs and factorial designs. For sUlVeys the topics include: simple random sampling, stratified and clUster sampling, ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages BMDP and SAS are used to carry out analyses.

Text To be advised

References

Cochran, W.G. Sampling Techniques 3rd edn (Wiley, 1977)

Kish, L. Survey Sampling (Wiley, 1965)

Neter, I., Wasserman, W. & Kutner, M.H. Applied Linear Statistical Models (Irwin, 1983)

Cochran, W.G. & Cox, G.M. Experimental Designs (Wiley, 1964)

Box, G.E.P., Hunter, W.G. & Hunter I.S. Statistics for Experiments (Wiley, 1978)

STATJ03 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS 6q>

Prerequisites STA TIOI Statistical Inference

HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester

Content

The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and illustrates the ways in which methods for analysing continuous, binary, and categorical data fit into this framework. TopiCS include the exponential family of distributions, maximum likelihood estimation, sampling distributions for goodness-of-fit statistics, linear models for continuous data (regression and analysis of variance), logistic regression, and log-linear modeIs. Students will implement these methods using various computet packages, including GUM.

§!lCTION FIVE

Text pobson, A.I.

An Introduction to Generalized Linear Modelling (Chapman & HaIl, 1989)

References

McCullagh, P. and NeIder J.A. Generalized Linear Models (Chapman & Hall, 1983)

Aitkin, M. et al. Statistical Modelling in GLIM (Oxford Science Publications, 1989)

STATJ04 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS

Prerequisites STA TIOI Statistical Inference

HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester

Content

6cp

This course is about the theory and practice of Time Series Analysis· the analysis of data collected at regular intervals in time (or space). Topics covered include: stationary processes, ARMA models, models for periodic phenomena, analysis using MINIT AD and other Time Series packages.

References

Cryer, J.D. Time Series Analysis (Duxbury Press, 1986).

Fuller, W.A. Introduction to Statistical Time Series (Wiley, 1976).

Box, G.E.P. & Jenkins, G.M. Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control (Holden Day, 1976).

EXTRANEOUS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Extraneous Subjects EDUC211 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 211 6cp

Prerequisite At least 36 credit points at the 100 level for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree

Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of short reports on the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools and completion of self-evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.

HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester

Content

Views ofMalhematics; the History of Mathematics; Mathematics in Different Cultural,SocialandIntellectual Contexts; the Nature and Content of School Mathematics.

The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools.

Reference

McQualter I.W. A Brief History of Nwnber, Computation, Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry, The Calculus and Statistics and Probability (Dept. of Education, University of Newcastle Education Research Report 1985)

EDUC212 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 212 6cp

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisite At least 36 credit points at the 100 level for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 202

lIours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of case study reports and completion of self-evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.

Content

Teacbingand Learning Mathematics; Planning and Implementing MathematicsLeamingActivities,CommunicatingMathematical Ideas, Negotiating Mathematical Meaning, How People Learn Mathematics.

The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with ways of teaching and learning school mathematics. Each student will be expected to prepare a case study. The case study is a report of how an individual school pupil has learned school mathematics. It records pupil background, pupil learning problems, methods used to diagnose the learning problems, remedial action taken and evaluation procedures used todeterrnine pupil success.

Reference

PolyaG. How To Solve It 2nd edn (Princeton U.P., 1973).

77

SEcriON FIVE

EDUC311 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 311 6cp

Not offered in 1990

Prerequisite At least 42 credit points from subjects at the 200 level of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 201

HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of short reports on lhe nature and hiSloryof mathematics taught in schools and completion of self·evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.

Content

Views of Mathematics; the History of Mathematics; Mathematics in Different Cultural, Social and Intellectual Contexts; theNature and Content of School Mathematics.

The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools.

References

Howson A.G. Wilson B. School Mathematics in the 1990' s.(Cambridge U.P,1986)

Kline M. Mathematics: The Loss of Certainty (Oxford U.P, 1980)

EDUC312 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 312 6cp

Not offered in }99O

Prerequisites At least 42 credit points from subjects at the 200 level of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 202

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on preparation of a seminar paper and completion of self·evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.

Content

Teaching and Learning Mathematics; Planning and Implementing MathematicsLearning Activities, Communicating Mathematical Ideas, Negotiating Mathematical Meaning, How People Learn Mathematics.

The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tu lorials dealing with ways ofteaching and learning school mathematics. Students will be expected to work as teacher aides in schools during some part of the year so they can prepare case studies on how people learn mathematics in groups.

References

Schoenfeld A. (ed)

78

Cognitille Science and MalhemaJics Education (Erlbaum NJ.1987)

EXTRANEOUS SUBffiCT DESCRWfIONS SECTION SIX

POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE REGULATIONS

Postgraduate Courses Studies may be undertaken for the following postgraduate qualifications:

Coursework Honours Degrees

Bachelor of Science (Honours)

Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours)

Diploma (Postgraduate)

Diploma in Coal Geology

Diploma in Mathematical Studies

Diploma in Psychology

Diploma in Science

Coursework Masters Degrees

Master of Scientific Studies

Research Degrees

Master of Mathematics

Master of Psychology (Clinical)

Master of Psychology (Educational)

Master of Science

Doctor of Philosophy

Bachelor of Science (Honours)

This is a separate degree to the Bachelor of Science (or equivalent qualification). It may be undertaken full·time over one year of study or part-time over two years. To qualify, candidates must pass one of the following combinations of SUbjects: Biology 401 and 402, Chemistry 401 and 402, Geography 401 and 402, Geology 401 and 402, Geology 401 and Mathematics 401, Physics 401 and 402, Physics 401 and Mathematics 401, Psychology 401 and 402, or Psychology 401 and Mathematics 401.

Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours) This degree is separate from the undergraduate Bachelor of Mathematics degree and may be taken fUll-time over one yearof study or part-time over two years. Students may choose one set of subjects from the following: Mathematics 401 and 402, Mathematics 401 and Economics 401, Mathematics 401 and Geology 401, Mathematics 401 and Physics 401, Mathematics and Psychology 401. Students may undertake 48 credit points in Statistics, chosen from STAT401, STAT402, STAT403, STAT404.STAT405.STAT406.STAT408.STAT409.STAT410 andSTAT411.

Diploma in Coal Geology (Not offered in 1990)

This is a specialist postgraduate diploma for graduates of this or another university who have completed a recognised degree including amajor sequence in Geology, or equivalent qualification. It is intended for those candidates who wish to enter the coal industry but have insufficient qualifications in the area of Coal Geology. It requires part-time attendance at the University over a minimum period of two years.

Diploma in Mathematical Studies This course is intended for graduates who wish to study more Mathematics than was available in their first degree. The course is sufficiently flexible to meet most graduates' needs.

Diploma in Science Graduates completing this postgraduate diploma must undertake two 400 level subjects from those subjects offered in the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science (Honours).

79

SECTION SIX

Master of Scientific Studies This is a coursework Masters degree which involves both lectures and the pursuit of an investigation which leads to a report. The prerequisite requirement is an Honours degree or a Diploma in Science, or equivalent qualification.

Master of Mathematics This is a Research degree by thesis requiring original contribution to knowledge in the area of Mathematics or Statistics. Entry would nonnally require an Honours degree. Enrolment can take place at any time in the year. Scholarships are available (competitively); applications close about October each year.

Master of Psychology (Clinical) and Master of Psychology (Educational) Thesedegreesaretwopostgraduatetrainingooursesinprofessional Psychology. Both courses require successful completion of coursework. practicum and research components. The prerequisi Ie for the Master of Psychology (Clinical) course is an Honours degree in Psychology or equivalent, and, for the Master of Psychology (Educational) course, a Bachelors degree majoring in Psychology, a teaching qualification and two years teaching experience or equivalent.

Applications for admission to the course close on October I each year and attendance at interviews is required generally in October! November in the year preceding intake.

Master of Science/Doctor of Philosophy These are research degrees involving the production of a thesis which advances the state of knowledge in the chosen discipline. Entry requirements are set out in the University Regulations. Prospective candidates should consult the Head of Department in the appropriate specialization.

80

POSTGRADUA'IE COURSES SECTION SIX

Regulations Relatingto the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1. General

These Regulations prescribe the requirements for the Honours degree of Bachelorof Science of the University ofNew?Nle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-Law 5.2.1.

Z. Definitions

In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to lime to qualify a candidate for the degree;

"Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;

"the degree" means the degree of Bach elor of Science (Honours);

"Department" means the Department or Departments offering particular subjects and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"Honours Subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject.

3. Admission to Candidature

In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science of the University of Newcastle or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree;

(b) have completed any additional work prescribed by the Head of the Department offering the honours subjects; and

(c) have obtained approval to enrol given by the Dean on the recommendation of Head of the Department offering the honours subject.

4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree

(l)Toqualify for admission to the degree acandidate shall, in one year of full-time study or two years of part-time study, complete two honours subjects for a total credit point score of 48 points.

(2)Students undertaking study in one discipline shall enrol in and pass two honours subjects offered by the one Department, to be chosen from:

Biology 401 and 402

Chemistry 401 and 402

Geography 401 and 402

Geology 401 and 402

Physics 401 and 402

Psychology 401 and 402

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) DEGREE REGULATIONS

(3)Students undertaking study in a combined Honours degree shall enrol in one honours subject from each of two Departments, in one of the following combinations;

Geology 401 and Mathematics 401

Mathematics 401 and Physics 401

Mathematics 401 and Psychology 401

The Head of each Department shall prescribe the contents of these honours subjects which may contain coursework, projects or athesis from any 400 level subject offered by that Department.

5. Subject

(1) To complete an honours subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field work and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.

(2) To pass an honours subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

6. Withdrawal

(1) A candidate may withdraw from an honours subject only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from an honours subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed in the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of Department, the Dean may grant pennission for withdrawal without penalty.

7. Classes of Honours

There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, Class II and Class 1lI. Class IT shall have two divisions, namely Division I and Division 2.

8. Relaxing Provision

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Regulations.

81

SECTION SIX BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) SUBJECTS

LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN THE HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or beuer average in appropriate Part III (pre-l990) or 300 level subjects.

Number Subject

BIOlAOI Biology Honours 401

BIOlA02 Biology Honours 402

CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401

CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402

GEOG401 Geography Honours 401

GEOG402 Geography Honours 402

GEOlAOl Geology Honours 401

GEOlA02 Geology Honours 402

PHYS401 Physics Honours 401

PHYS402 Physics Honours 402

PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401

PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402

F""Full Year

Sl=Semester 1

S2=Semester 2

82

Credit Points Value When

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

24 F

Prerequisites! Corequisites 1990

Biology rnA or lIIB

B10lAOl

Chemistry llIA

arIIm

CHEM401

Geography IlIA or lIB

GEOG401

Geology IlIA or lIB

GEOlAOI

Physics ilIA

(Credit Average)

PHYS40l

Consult Department

PSYC40l

Prerequisites! Corequisites 1991

Consult Department

B10lAO!

Any 4 Level 300

at Credit Grade

CHEM401

GEOG!Ol & 102

and either

(GEOG201 & 301)

or

(GEOG202 & 302)

GEOG401

GEOL3Ol & 302

GEOlAOI

Any 4 PHYS300

PHYS401

Consu1t Department

PSYC401

§ECTIONSIX

Regulations Governing the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics 1. These regulations prescribe the requirements for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Mathematics ofthe University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-Law 5.2.1.

2. Definitions

IntheseRegulations,unlessihecontextorsubjectmatterotherwise indicates or requires:

"wurse" means the programme of studies prescribed from time to time to qualify a candidate for the degree;

"Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;

"the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours);

"Department" means the Department or Departments offering particular subjects and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"Honours subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject.

3. Admission to Candidature

In orderla be admitted to candidature for the degree, an applicant shall

(a) havecompleted the requirements for admission to the Ordinary degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University of Newcastle or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree;

(b) have satisfactorilY completed any additional work prescribed by the Head of the Department offering the honours subject; and

(e) have obtained approval to enrol given by the Dean on the recommendation of the Head of the Department offering the honours subject.

4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree

(1) To qualify for admission to the degree acandidate shall, in one year offull-time study ortwo years of part-time study, complete two honours subjects for a total credit point score of 48 points.

(2) Students undertaking study in Mathematics shall enrol in and pass Mathematics 401 and 402. *Students undertaking study in Statistics shall enrol in 48 credit points to be chosen, with the approval ofthe Head of Department, from STAT401, STAT402, STAT403, STAT404, STAT405, STAT406, STAT408, STAT409, STAT4iO and STAT4I!.

·Subject 10 Council Approval

BACHELOR OF MA TIlEMA TICS (HONOURS) REGULATIONS

(3) Students undertaking study in a combined honours degree shall enrol in one honours subject from each of two Departments, in one of the follOwing combinations:

Economics 401 and Mathematics 401

Geology 401 and Mathematics 401

Mathematics 401 and Physics 401

Mathematics 401 and Psychology 401

The Head of each Department shall prescribe the content of these honours subjects which may contain coursework, projects or a thesis from any 400 level subject offered by that Department.

s. Subject

(1) To complete an honours subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field work: and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.

(2) To pass an honours subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

6. Withdrawal

(1) A candidate may withdraw from an honours subject only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from an honours subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of the Department, the Dean may grant permissionforwithdrawal without penalty.

7. Classes of Honours

There shall be three classes of honours: ClassI, Class II and Class ID. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

8. Relaxing Provision

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Regulations.

83

SEcrIONSIX

confennent or award. Further. such standing shall not contribute any more than twenty·four credit points towards the Diploma.

8.(1) To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory classes and submit such wriuen work as the Faculty Board may require.

(2) To pass a subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board may require.

9.(1) A candidate may withdraw from emolment in a subject or the Diploma only bynotifying the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permissionby the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:

(a) in case of a subject offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the ninth week of the first semester;

(b) in case of a subject offered only in the second semester, the Monday of the ninth week of second semester;

(c) in case of any other subject, the Monday of the third week of second semester.

10. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.

86

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA REGULATIONS

Requirements for the Diploma in Psychology General

1. There shall be a Diploma in Psychology.

2. In these Requirements, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

the "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

the "Board of Stud ies" means the Board of Studies in Psychology; and

the "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

3. A candidate for the Diploma shall register in one of the following specialisalions:

(a) Clinical Psychology; or

(b) Educational Psychology.

4, The Diploma shall be awarded in one grade only.

S. A candidate may withdraw from the course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

6. In exceptional circumstances, the Senate may, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, relax any provision of these Requirements.

Clinical Specialisation

7. An applicant for registration as a candidate forthe Diplomain the Clinical Specialisation shall:

(a) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a Bachelor's degree with honours in Psychology in the University of Newcastle or to such a degree in another university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; and

(b) be selected for admission to the course by the Board of Studies which shall, in making this determination, take account of the applicant's academic qualifications, experience, and thereportof an intetview which shall be conducted by a selection committee which the Board shall appoint.

8. (a) Notwithstanding the provision of subsection (1) of Section 7, the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies, may pennit to register as a provisional candidate a person who has satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or another university approved forthis purpose by the Faculty, provided that the course completed for that degree by the applicant included a major study in Psychology.

(b)A candidate permitted to register provisionally under the provisions of subsection (1) of this Section shall complete such work and pass such examinations at Bachelor's degree honoWS level as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board before hiS registration may be confinned by the Faculty Board.

SECTION SIX

9. A candidate for the Diploma in the Clinical Specialisation shall, in not less than two years of part-time enrolment, attend sUch lectures, seminars and tutorials; complete such written and practical work; and pass such examinations as may be prescribed by the Board of Studies.

Educational Specialisation

10. An applicant for registration as a candidate for the Diploma in the Educational Specialisation shall:

(a) (i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a Bachelor's degree in the University of Newcastle and have included in the qualifying course f orthat degree at least four 300 level Psychology subjects

or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to an equivalent qualification in another university recognised for this purpose by the Faculty Board;

(b) have satisfied all of the requirements for the award of the Diploma in Education of the University of Newcastle or another teaching qualification approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board;

(c) have at least two years teaching or other relevant practical experience approved by the Board of Studies; and

(d) beselecled for admission lothe course by the Board of Studies which shall, in making this determination, take account of the applicant's academic qualifications; experience; and the report of an intetview which shall be conducted by a selection committee which the Board shan appoint.

11. A candidate forthe Diplomain the Educational Specialisation shall, in not less than two years of full-time enrolment or an equivalent period of part -time enrol ment, attend lectures, seminars and tutorials; complete such written and practical work; and pass such examinations as may be prescribed by the Board of Studies.

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA REGULATIONS

Regulations Governing the Diploma in Science 1. These Regulations prescribe the requirements forthe Diploma in Science of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.

2. In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"Department" means the Department offering the subject in which a person is enrolled or is proposing to enrol;

"Diploma" means the Diploma in Science;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;

"a Subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject offered in the course leading to the Honours degree of Bachelor of Science.

3. (1) An applicant for admission to candidature for the diploma shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle, or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of any other tertiary institution.

(2) An applicant shall have met such requirements for entry to a subject as may be prescribed from time to time by the Head of the Department and approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at another tertiary institution a standard of perfonnance deemed by the Head of the Department to be equivalent

4. (1) To qualify forthe Diploma, acandidate shall enrol and shall complete two subjects to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board.

(2)Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, the two subjects shall be satisfactorily completed in notless than one year of full-time study or not less than two years of part· time study.

5. To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory classes, and submit such written and other work as the Faculty Board may require and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board may preScribe.

6. (1) A candidate may withdraw from asubject only by notifying the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from a subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed in the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of Department, the Dean may grant permission for withdrawal without penalty.

7. The Diploma shall be awarded in one of three classes,namely Class I, Class II and Qass m. Class II shall have two divisions. The Gasses shall indicate a level of achievement comparable with that of a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Honours).

8. The Diploma shall specify the subjects completed.

9. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.

87

SECfIONSIX

Regulations Governing Masters Degrees Part I - General 1. (1 ) These regulations prescribe theconditions and requirements relating to the degrees of Master of Architecture, Master of Arts, Master of Commerce, Master of Computer Science, Master of Computing, Master of Education, Master of Educational Studies, Master of Engineering, Master ofEnginecring Science, Masterof Enrivonmental Studies, MasterofLaw, MasterofLeuers. Master of Mathematics, Master of Psychology (Oinica1), Master of Psychology (Educational), Mastera! Science, Master of Medical Science, MastcrofMedical Statistics, MasterofScientificStudies. Master of Special Education and Master of Surveying.

(2) In these Regulations and the Schedules thereto, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible for the course in which a person is emolled or is proposing to emol;

"programme" means the programme of research and study prescribed in the Schedule;

"Schedule" means the Schedule of these Regulations pertaining to the course in which a person is enrolled oris proposing toemol; and

"thesis" means any thesis or dissertation submitted by a candidate.

(3) These Regulations shall not apply to degrees conferred Iwnoris causa.

(4) A degree of Master shall be conferrcd in one grade only.

2. An application for admission to candidature for a degree of Master shall be made on the prescribed fonn and lodged with the Secretary to the University by the prescribed date.

3.(1) To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) (i) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor in the University of Newcastle as specified in the Schedule; or

(ii) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or equivalent qualification, approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board, in another tertiary institution; or

(iii) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Senate on the recommcndation of the FaculL y Board or otherwise as may be specified in the Schedule; and

(b) have satisfied such other requirements as may be specified in the Schedule.

(2) Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule, applications for admission to candidature shall be considered by the Faculty Board which may approve or reject any application.

(3) An applicant shall not be admitted to candidature unless adequate supervision and facilities are available. Whether these are available shall be determined by the Faculty Board unless the Schedule otherwise providcs.

88

MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS

4. To qualify for admission to adegreeofMasteracandidate shall enrol and satisfy the requirements of these Regulations including the Schedule.

S. The programme shall be carried out:-

(a) under the guidance of a supervisor or supervisors either appointed by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in the Schedule; or

(b) as the Faculty Board may otherwise detennme.

6. Upon request by acandidate the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the period for the programme prescribed in the Schedule.

7. (l) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by infonning the Secrctary to the University in writing and such withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty.

The relevant date shall be:

(a) in case of a subject offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the ninth week of the first semester;

(b) in case of a subject offered only in the second semester, the Monday of the ninth week of second semester;

(c) in case of any other subject, the Monday of the third week of second semester.

8. (1) If the Faculty Board is of the opinion that the candidate is not making satisfactory progress towards the degree then it may terminate the candidature or place such conditions on its continuation as it deems fit.

(2) For the purpose of assessing a candidate's progress, the Faculty Board may require any candidate to submit a report or reports on their progress.

(3) A candidate against whom adecision of the Faculty Board has been made under Regulation 8(1) of these Regulations may request that the Faculty Board cause the case to bereviewed. Such request shall be made tothe Dean of the Faculty within sevendays from the date of posting to the candidate the advice of the Faculty Board's decision or such further period as the Dean may accept.

(4) A candidate may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any decision made following the review under Regulation 8(3) of these Regulations.

9. In exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these RegUlations.

Part II - Examination and Results 10. The Examination Regulations approved from time to time by the Council shall apply to all examinations with respect to a degree of Master with the exception of the examination of a thesis which shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of Regulations 12 to 16 inclusive of these Regulations.

SECfION SIX

11. The Faculty Board shall consider the results in subjects, the reports of examiners and any otherrecommendations prescribed in the Schedule and shall decide:

(a) to recommend to the Council that the candidate be admitted to the degree; or

(b) in a case where a thesis has been submitted, to permit the candidate to resubmit an amended thesis within twelve fnonths of the date on which the candidate is advised of the result of the first examination or within such longer period of time as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or

(c) to require the candidate to undertake such further oral, written or practical examinations as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or

(d) not to recommend that the candidate be admitted to the degree, in which case the candidature shall be terminated.

Part III - Provisions Relating to Theses 12. (l)The subject of a thesis shall be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in which the candidate is carrying out the research for the thesis.

(2) The thesis shall not contain as its main content any work or material which has previously been submitted by the candidate for a degree in any tertiary institution unless the Faculty Board otherwise pennits.

13.The candidate shall give to the Secretary to the University three months' written notice of the date the candidate expects to submit a thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by any prescribed fee:

14.(1) The candidate shall comply with the following provisions concerning the presentation of a thesis:

(a) the thesis shall contain anabstract of approximately 200 words describing its content;

(b) the thesis shall be typed and bound in a mannerprescribed by the University;

(c) three copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with:

(i) a certificate signed by the candidate that the main content of the thesis has not been submitted by the candidate for a degree of any other tertiary institution; and

(ii) a certificate signed by the supeIVisor indicating whether the candidate has completed the programme and whether the thesis is of sufficient academic merit to warrant examination; and

(iii) if the candidate so desires, any documents or published work of the candidate whether bearing on the subject of the thesis or not.

(2) The Faculty Board shall determine the course of action to be taken should the certificate of the supervisor indicate that in the opinion of the supervisor the thesis is not of sufficient academic merit to warrant examination.

• at present there is no fee payable

MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS

15. The University shall beentitled to retain the submitted copies of the thesis, accompanying documents and published work. The University shall be free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed and, subject to the proviSions of the Copyright Act, 1968(Com), may issue it in whole or any part in photocopy or microfilm or other copying medium.

16.(1) For each candidate two examiners, at least one of whom shall be an external examiner (being a person who is not a member of the staff of the University) shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule.

(2) If the examiners' reports are such that the Faculty Board is unable to make any decision pursuant to Regulation 11 of these Regulations, a third examiner shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule.

SCHEDULE 8 - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS

1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics.

2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with honours in the area of studyin which the applicant proposes tocarry out research orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another University; or

(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another tertiary institution and have completed such work and sat for such examinations as the Faculty Board may have detenninedand have achievedastandard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class honours in an appropriate subject; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic or professional qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme consisting of:

(a) such examinations and other such work as may be described by the Faculty Board; and

(b) a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation or design.

4. The programme shall be completed in not less than two years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year.

S. A part-time candidate shall, except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, which shall begivenonlyin special circumstances:

(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and

(b) take partin research seminars within the Department in which the the programme is being carried oul.

6. Any third examiner shall be an cxternal examiner . 89

SECfION SIX

SCHEDULE 9 - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (CLINICAL)

1.(1 ) The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Psychology(Clinical).

(2) Unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires,

"the Board" means the Board of Studies in Psychology.

2. On the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Psychology. the Board shall appoint a coursecontroller who shall recommend to the Board the nature and extent of the programmes to be prescribed and shall be responsible for the collation of all written work submitted by candidates in pursuing those programmes.

3. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor with Honours in Psychology of the University of Newcastle orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university; or

(b) on the recommendation of the Board, have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle orto a degree, approved f orlhis purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university, provided that the course completed for that degree by the applicant included a major sequence in Psychology.

4.(1) The Board shall consider each application for admission to candidature and shall make a decision thereon.

(2) Before approving an admission to candidature under Section 3(b) of this schedule the Board may require an applicant to complete such work and pass such examinations at honours level as may be prescribed by the Board.

(3) Before an application for admission to candidature is approved, the Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and facilities are available.

(4) In considering an application, the Board sha1l take account of the applicant's academic qualifications and experience, the report of an interview with the applicant and any other selection procedures applied to the applicant as determined by the Board. The inteIView and selection procedures shall be conducted by a Selection Committee approved by the Board.

5.(1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall:

(a) attend such lectures, seminars and tutorials and complete to the satisfaction of the Board such written and practical work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Board; and

(b) submit a thesis embodying the results of an empirical inves· tigation.

(2) The programme shall be completed in not less than two years and, except with the permission of the Faculty Board given on the recommendation of the Board, not more than six years.

6.(1) Examiners shall be appointed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board.

90

MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS

(2) One examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 16(1) of these Regulations shall be an internal examiner being a member of the staff of the University.

7. Before a decision is made under Regulation 11 of these Regulations the Board shall consider:

(1) the examiners' report on the thesis; and

(2) areport of the internal examiner made in consultation with the course controller on the candidate's perfonnance in the work prescribed under section 5(1) of this Schedule;

and shall submit these to the Faculty Board together with its recommendation. The Faculty Board shall make its decision in the light of these reports and on the recommendation of the BOard.

SCHEDULE 10 - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (EDUCATIONAL)

1.(1) The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall beresponsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Psychology(Educational).

(2)Unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires,

"the Board" means the Board of Studies in Psychology.

2. On the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Psychology, the Board shall appoint acoursecontrollerwho shall recommend to the Board the nature and extent of the programmes to be prescribed and shall be responsible for the collation of all written work submitted by candidates in pursuing those programmes.

3. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university and have satisfactorily completed four 300 level Psychology subjects orreached a standard in Psychology deemed by the Board to be equivalent; and

b) have satisfied all the requirements for the award of the Diploma in Education of the University of Newcastle or another teaching qualification approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; and

(c) have at least two years teaching or other relevant practical experience approved by the Board.

4.(1) The Board shall consider each application for admission to candidature and shall make a decision thereon.

(2) Before an application for admission to candidature is approved. the Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and facilities are available.

(3) In considering an application, the Board shall take account of the applicant's academic qualifications and experience, and also the report of an interview with the applicant and any othel selection procedures applied to the applicant as determined by the Board, which shall be conducted by a Selection Committee approved by the Board.

5.(1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall:

SECTION SIX

(a) attend such lectures, seminars and tutorials, and complete to the satisfaction of the Board such written and practical work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Board; and

(b) submit a thesis embodying the results of an empirical investigation.

(2) The programme shall be completed in not less than two years and, except with the pennission of the Faculty Board given on the recommendalion of the Board, not more than six years.

6.(1) Examiners shall be appointed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board.

(2) One examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 16(1) of these Regulations shall be an internal examiner being a member of the staff of the University.

7. Before a decision is made under Regulation 11 of these Regulations the Board shall consider:

(a) the examiners' reports on the thesis; and

(b) areportofthe internal examiner made in consultation with the course controller on the candidate's performance in the work prescribed under section 5(1) of this Schedule;

and shall submit these to the Faculty Board together with its recommendation. The Faculty Board shall make its decision in theJight of these reports and on the recommendalionofthe Board.

SCHEDULE I I - MASTER OF SCIENCE

1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science may be enrolled in either the Faculty of Engineering or the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. The Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled shall be responsible for the programme.

2.(1) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Qass I or Class II of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of this or any other university; or

(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University ofN ewcastle or other approved university and have completed such work and passed such examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class Honours in an appropriate subject; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty BoardontherecommendationoftheHeadoftheDepartment in which the applicant proposes tocarry out the programme.

(2) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Engineering an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or

MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS

other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board in the area in which the applicant proposes to carry out research; or

(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board such workand examinations asdetermined by the Faculty Board; or

(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation oftheI-leadoftheDepartment in which the candidate proposes tocarry out the programme.

3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme consisting of:

(a) such work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and

(b) a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation or design.

4. The programme shall be completed:

(a) in not less than two academic years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period to not less than one academic year; and

(b) except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, in not more than five years.

5.(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances, a part-time candidate enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall:

(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and

b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the programme is being carried out.

(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidale enrolled in the Faculty of Engineering shall take part in the research seminars within the Department in which the programme is being carried oul.

SCHEDULE \3 - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STUDIES

1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Scientific Studies.

2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) (i) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or other tertiary institution approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or

91

SECfION SIX

(ii) have satisfied the requirements for Ute Diploma in Science or Equivalent Honours in the University of Newcastle, or an equivalent qualification in another tertiary institution; or

(iii) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved bythePaculty Board; and

(b) satisfy the Faculty Board that the candidate is academically competent to undertake the proposed programme.

3. (1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme prescribed by the Dean on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments offering the units comprising the programme.

(2) The programme shan consist of 12 units of work of which not less than 200r more than 4 shall comprise the investigation of and report on a project specified by the Dean.

(3) Units of work, other than those comprising the project, shall require attendance at lectures, seminars and tutorials and the completion to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board of such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine.

4. Except with the permission oftheFaculty Board the programme shall becompleted in not less than one year and not more than four years.

92

MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS

,

SECTION SEVEN

POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions The subject and topic outlines and reading lists which follow are set out in a standard fonnat to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical terms used in this Handbook.

Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed before acandidate enrols in a particular subject. The only prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken before emolling in the particular topic. To eruol in any subject which the topic may be part of, the prerequisites for that subject must still be satisfied.

Wherea prerequisite is marked as advisory ,lectures will be given on the assumption that the subject or topic has been completed as indicated.

Corequisites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently.

Examination. Under examination regUlations "examination" includes mid· year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined. See particularly the general statement in the Department of Mathematics section headed "Progressive Assessment" referring to Mathematics subjects.

Texts are essential books recommended for purchase.

References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, however. need not be purchased.

mOIAO!} mOIA02}

HONOURS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites Completion of Ordinary Degree requirements and permission of the Head of the Department.

ContenJ

Carry out a research project and complete a thesis. essay, viva and two seminars.

CHEM40!} HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY CHEM402}

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites: Completion of Ordinary Degree requirements and permission of the Head of Department. For 1990. atleast acredit grade in either Chemistry InA or llIB will be the nonnal expectation. After 1990 an average credit grade in at least four 300 level Chemistry subjects will berequired. Students intending to undertake the Honours programme should notify the Head of Department of their intention by 1 October in their final undergraduate year and confinn this as soonas final examination resulLs are known.

Content

The Honours programme extends over two semesters orils part­time equivalent and consists of:

i) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 60 hours)

ii) a reading list in the main area of interest

iii) a supervised research project. the results of which are embodied in a thesis and presented as a seminar

Examination Half each of the lecture course and the reading list will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the cnd of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a

93

SECTION SEVEN

committee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part·time subjects will have their assessment spread accordingly over two academic years.

For grading purposes equal weighting will be given to the three components of the programme.

GE0L401) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY GE0L402)

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisiles 1990 Geology IlIA, completion of ordinary degree requirements and permission of the Head of the Department.

Hours To be advised

Examination

(i) a viva voce examination

(ti) research work carried out and its presentation in a thesis

(iii) a reading thesis

(iv) such other work, e.g. seminars, assignments, earlier academic record, which may be considered relevant

Content

Part A

Lecture·tutorial work with directed reading in the following fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography, geochemistry; igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; sedimentology; stratigraphy, palaeontology; structural geology; economic geology; engineering geology.

Not all fields will be available every year.

PartB

A reading thesis and a research project, the results of which are to be embodied in a thesis.

GEOL401) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY 24cp+ MATH401) AND MATHEMATICS 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Geology IlIA or Geology lIIC and Mathematics IlIA and such additional work as is required for combined honours students by the Department of Mathematics. A student desiring admission to this subject must apply in writing to the Dean of the Faculty before 7 December of the preceding year.

Hours To be advised

Content

Atleastfourtopics (24 credit points) chosen from those available to honours students in Mathematics for the current year together with work equal to 24 credit points offered by the Department of Geology for that year. GEOL401 will also include a major thesis which embodies the results of a field research project involving the application of mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other work e.g seminars and assignments may be required by either Department.

94

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

MATH401)HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS MATH402)

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics rnA and at least one of Mathematics lIm, Computer Science rnA or Statistics rn and additional work as prescribed by the Heads of the Departments concerned.

Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full·time year or 4 lecture hours per week over two part·time years.

Examination At least eight 2 hour final papers, and a study under direction of a special topic using relevant published material and presented in written fonn. Work on this thesis normally starts early in February.

Content

A selection of at least eight Mathematics 400 level topics. The topics offered may be from any branch of Mathematics including Pure Mathematics, Applied Mathematics, Statistics, Computer Science and Operations Research as exemplified in the publicalion Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given later in this section of the Handbook, but the Department should be consulted for further details, including the current list of suitable topics from other Departments.

Students desiring admission to this subject should apply in writing to the Head of the Department before 20 Decemberofthe preceding year.

400 LEVEL MA THEMA TICS TOPICS

Note: A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the first semester in Room V107 at 1.00 pm to detennine both the timetable for these topics and which topics are to be offered for the year.

Other topics than those listed here will be offered from time to time, and even at short notice by visitors to the Department. Intending students should consult the Department early in the year regarding topics.

ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS OF MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS

Prerequisites Topics CO and PD

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

The nonnal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma, or ionized gas, penneated by magnetic fields. Moreover, these fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant, or at least significant, in controlling the structure of the region. The aim of this course is to investigate the effects of astrophYSical magnetic fields, ranging from 10·6 gauss in the galaxy to 1012 gauss in a neutron star.

References

Chandrasekhar, S. Hydrodynamic and Hydromagnetic Stability (Oxford, 1961)

SEcrlON SEVEN

Cowling, T.G. Magnetohydrodynamics (lnterscience, 1957)

De Jong, T. & Maeder, A.(ed) Star Fonnation (Reidel, 1977)

Meste!, L. Effects oj Magnetic Fields (Mem Sc Roy Sc ~ege (6) 8 791975)

Moffatt, H.K. Magnetic Field Generation in Electrically Conducting Fluids (Cambridge U.P., 1978)

Spiegel, E.A. & Zahn, LP.(eds) Problems of Stellar Convection (Springer, 1976)

BANACH ALGEBRA

Corequisites Topic W

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

A Banach Algebra is a mathematical structure where the two main strands of pure mathematical study -the topological and the algebraic - are united in fruitful contact. The course will coverthe following subject matter. Nonned algebras; regular and singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; the Gelfand·Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; ideals and maximal ideals. Commutative Banach algebras; the Gelfand theory and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak topologies, the Banach·Alaoglu theorem, the Gelfand topology. Involutions in Banach algebras; hermitian involutions; the Gelfand·Naimark representation theorem for commutive B'" algebras. Numerical range of an element in a nonned algebra; relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B'" algebras are symmetric, discussion of the Gelfand·Naimark representation theorem for B '" algebras. Applications of Banach a1gebra theory.

Text

Ze!azko, W. Banach Algebras (Elsevier, 1973)

References

Bachman, G. & Narici, L. Functional Analysis (Academic. 1966)

Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. Complete Normed Algebras (Springer, 1973)

Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. Numerical Ranges oj Operators on Normed Spaces and Elements oJNormedAlgebras (Cambridge, 1970)

Naimark, M.A. Nonned Rings (Noordhoff, 1959)

Rickart. C.E. GeneraITheoryofBanachAlgebras(VanNostrand,I960)

Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw·Hill, 1973)

POSTGRADUA 1E sUBmcr DESCRIPTIONS

Simmons, G.F. Introduction to TopoJogyandModernAnalysis(McGraw. Hill,1963)

Wilansky, A. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964)

CONYEX ANALYSIS

Corequisites Topic W

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Convexity has become an increasingly important concept in analysis: much of current research in functional analysis concerns generalising to convex functions, properties previously studied for the norm; much of interest in convexity has arisen from areas of applied mathematics related to fixed point theory and optimisation problems. We begin with a study of convex sets and functions defined on linear spaces: gauges of convex sets, separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces generated by convex sets: metrisability, nonnability and f"mite dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and Banach·Alaoglu theorem. We study extreme points of convex sets, the Krein·Milman theorem. We give particular attention to the study of differentiation of convex functions on nonnedlinear spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative, Mazur's and Asplund's theorems.

Text

Giles, J.R. Convex Analysis withAppJication in the Differentiation of Convex Functions (Pitman, 1982)

References

Barbu, V. & Precupanu, T. Convexity and Optimization in Banach Spaces (Sijthoff & Noordhoff,1978)

Clarke, F.H. Optimization and non-smooth analysis (Wiley, 1983)

Day,M.M. Normed Linear Spaces (Springer, 1973)

Diestel, J. Geometry of Banach Spaces· Selected Topics (Springer, 1975)

Ekeland, I. & Ternan, R. ConvexAnalysisandVariationalProbJems(NorthHoIland, 1976)

Giles, J.R. Analysis oj Normed Linear Spaces (University of Newcastle, 1978)

Holmes, R.B. Geometric Functional Analysis and its Applications (Springer, 1975)

Roberts, A.W. & Varberg, D.E. Convex Functions (Academic, 1970)

95

SECfION SEVEN

Rockafeller, R T. Convex Analysis (Princeton, 1970)

Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw~Hill, 1973)

Valentine, F.A. Convex Sets (McGraw~Hill, 1964)

Wilansky,A. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964)

FLVID STATISTICAL MECHANICS

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Cluster-diagrammatic expansions-low density-solutions; integrodifferential equations (BGY, HNC, PY)-high density solutions; quantum liquids -Wu-Feenburg fermion extension; numerical solution of integral equations; phase transitions­diagrammatic approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; liquid metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics and Monte Carlo computer simulation; irreversibility; transport phenomena. Polymeric systems.

Text

Croxton, C.A. Introduction to Liquid State Physics (Wiley, 1975)

References

Croxton, C.A. Liquid State Physics -AS talistical M echanicall ntroduction (Cambridge V.P., 1974)

FOVNDATIONS OF MODERN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY

Prerequisite Topic CO

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This topic will introduce basic concepts of the local theory of differentiable manifolds. Vector fields, differential forms, and their mapping. Frobenius' theorem. Fundamental properties of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. PrinCiple and associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of linear frames, affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric, geodesics. Riemannian manifolds.

References

Auslander, L. Differential Geometry (Harper & Row, 1967)

Chevalley, C. Theory of Lie Groups Vol. 1 (Princeton, 1946)

Kobayashi, S. & Nomizu, K.

96

F ountiationsofDifferential Geometry Vol. 1 (Interscience, 1963)

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO AROVND 1900

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

A course of 26 lectures on the history of mathematics with emphasis on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for putting the analysis into context. Where feasible, use will be made of original material, in translation. The course will be assessed by essays and a final 2 hour examination.

Topics to be covered include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity, irrationality, infmity, infinitesimal, magnitude, ratio, proportion and their treatment in Elements V, XII and the works of Archimedes; developments of number systems and theirequi valents; scholastic mathematics; virtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature by infinitesimals and by "geometry"; Cartesian geometry; 17th and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysis in the 19th century with stress on the developments of number systems, continuity, function concept, differentiability, integrability.

References Lists will be presented during the course.

Students interested in this or other topics on aspects of the History of Mathematics should approach the lecturer concerned as soon as possible.

LINEAR OPERATORS

Prerequisites Topics V & W

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

The theory of linear operators on Hilbert and Banach spaces is an important theory particularly because of its applications to many areas of pure and applied science. We consider further aspects of normed linear space theory, the algebra of continuous linear operators on a normed linear space, the spectrum and numerical range of a continuous linear operator, and conjugate operators. We discuss the theory of compact linear operators and the Riesz­Schauder Theory for such operators. The course concentrates on spectral theory for different types of operator on Hilbert space: compact normal, self-adjoint and normal operators.

References

Bachman, G. & Narici, L. Functional Analysis (paperback Academic, 1966)

Brown, A. & Page, A. Elements of Functional Analysis (Van Nostrand, 1970)

Dunford, N. & Schwarts, J. Linear Operators (lnterscience, 1958)

Halmos, H. A J/ ilbert space Problem Book (VanNostrand, 1967)

Kreysig, E. Introduction to Functional Analysis with Applications (Wiley, 1978)

SECTION SEVEN

Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw-Hill, 1973)

Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. Introduction to Functional Analysis (Wiley,. 1980)

MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Physiology; the study of how the body works based on the knowledge of how it is constructed - essentially dates from early in the seventeenth century when the English physician Harvey showed that blood circulates constantly through the body. The intrusion of engineering into this field is well known through the wide publicity given to (for example) heart by-pass and kidney dialysis machines, cardiac assist pacemakers, and prosthetic devices such as hip and knee joints; the obviously beneficial union has led to the establishment of Bioengineering Departments within universities and hospitals. Perhaps the earliest demonstration of mathematics', useful application in (some areas of) physiology is the mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, from the basic equations of continuum motion, of Poiseuille's empirical formula for flow through narrow straight tubes; detailed models of the cardiovascular circulatory system have recently been developed, Mathematical models have also been formulated for actions such as coughing, micturition and walking, as well as for the more vital processes involved in gas exchange in the lungs, mass transport between lungs and blood and blood and tissue, metabolic exchanges within tissues, enzyme kinetics, signal conduction along nerve fibres, sperm transport in the cervix. Indeed, mathematical engineering might now be said to be part of the conspiracy to produce super humans (e.g. see "Fast RunningTracks"in Dec. 1978 issue of Scientific American).

This course will examine in some detail a few of the previously mentioned mathematical models; relevant physiological material will be introduced as required.

References

Bergel, D.H. (ed) Cardiovascular Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II (Academic, 1972)

Caro, e.G., Pedley, T.J. The Mechanics of the Circulation (Oxford, 1978)

Christensen, H.N. Biological Transport (Benjamin, 1975)

Fung, Y.C. Biodynamics: Circulation (Springer, 1984)

Fung, Y.C. Biomechanics: Mechanical Properties of Living Tissues (Springer, 1981)

Fung, Y.C., Perrone, N. & Amiker, M. (eds) Biomechanics: Its Foundations and Objectives (Prentice· HaIl,I972)

Transport Phenomena atul Living Systems (Wiley,1974)

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Margaria, R. Biomechanics atul Energetics of Muscular Eurcise (Clarendon, 1976)

Pedley, T.J. The Fluid Mechanics of Large Blood Vessels (Cambridge V.P., 1980)

West, J.B. (ed) BioengineeringAspectsoftheLung(MarcelDekker, 1977)

NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS

Prerequisite Topic P

HOUTS About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Conlent

Physical problems often give rise to ordinary differential equations which have oscillatory solutions. This course will be concerned with the existence and stability of periodic solutions of such differential equations, and will coverthe following subjects; two­dimensional autonomous systems, limit sets, and the Poincare­Bendixson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its usein finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking, jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic solutions. Attention will be paid to applications throughout the course.

References

Hale, J.K. Ordinary Differential Equations (Wiley, 1969)

Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S Differenlial Equations, Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra (Academic, 1974)

Marsden, 1.E. & McCracken, M. The H opfB ijurcalionatul its Applications (Springer, 1976)

Nayfeh, AH. & Mook, D.T. Nonlinear Oscillations (Wiley, 1979)

Stoker, J.J. Nonlinear Vibrations (Wiley, 1950)

PERTVRBA nON THEORY

Prerequisites Topics CO, P or MATH 201/203/304

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

Regularperturbation methods, including parameter and coordinate perturbations. A discussion of the sources of nonuniformity in perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and the methods of matched and composite asymptotic expansions. The method of multiple scales.

References Bender, C.M. & Orszag, S.A.

Advanced Mathematical Methods for Engineers (McGraw-Hill, 1978)

Scienlists and

97

SECf10N SEVEN

Cole,J.D. Perturbation Methods in Applied Math2matics (Blaisdell, (968)

Nayfeh, A.H. lnzroduclion 10 Perturbation Techniques (Wiley. 1981)

Nayfeh, A.H. Perturbation Methods (Wiley, 1973)

Van Dyke,M. Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics (Parabolic, 1975)

QUANTUM MECHANICS

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

ConJenl

Operators; Schrodingerequation; one dimensional motion; parity; harmonic oscillator; angular momentum; central potential; eigenfunction; spin and statistics; Rutherford scattering; scattering theory phase shift analysis; nucleon-nucleon interaction; spin­dependent interaction; operators and stale vectors; Schrodinger equations of motion; Heisenberg equation of motion. Quantum molecular orbitals; hybridization; LeAD theory; MO theory.

Texts

Croxton, C.A. Introductory Eigenphysics (Wiley. 1974)

Matthews, P,T. IntroductionloQuantumMechanics(McGraw-Hill.1968)

RADICAl.'i & ANNIHILATORS

Prerequisite Topic T or X

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This topic will briefly outline the classical theory of finite dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of radical, idempotence, ring, chain conditions, etc. Hopefully thus set in perspective, the next part will deal with the Artin-Hopkins­Jacobson ring theory and the significance of other radicals when finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various radicals, noetherian rings, left and right annihilators and the Goldie-Small theorems will end the topic

References

Cohn,P. Algebra Vol. 2 (Wiley, 1977)

Divinsky. N. RingsandRadicais (Allen & Vnwin, 1964)

Herstein, I.N. Non-commutative Rings (Wiley, 1968)

Kaplansky,1. Fields and Rings (Chicago V.P., 1969)

98

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

McCoy,N. The Theory of Rings (McMillan, 1965)

SYMMETRY

Prerequisites Some knowledge of Linear Algebra

Hours About 27 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

This course studies various aspects of symmetry. Matters discussed may include: invariance of lattices, crystals and associated functions and equations; permutation groups; fmite geometries; regular and strongly-regular graphs; designs; tactical configurations, "classical" simple groups, Matrix groups, representations, characters.

References

Biggs,N. Finite Groups of AuJomorphisms (Cambridge V.P., 1971)

Carmichael, R.D_ Groups of Finite Order (Dover reprint, 1984)

Harris, D.C. & Bertolucci, M.D. Symmetry and Spectroscopy (Oxford, 1978)

Rosen. J. Symmetry Discovered (Cambridge, 1975)

Shubnikov, A.V. & Koptsik, V.A. Symmetry in Science and Art (Plenum, 1974)

Weyl,H. Symmetry (Princeton, 1973)

White.A.T. Graphs. Groups and Surfaces (North-Holland, 1973)

VISCOUS FLOW THEORY

Prerequisite Topic Q or MATH 306

Hours About 1:7 lecture hours

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

Basic equations. Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations. Approximate solutions: theory of very slow motion, boundary layer theory, etc.

References

Batchelor, G.K. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge V.P., 1967)

Landau, L.D. & Lifshitz, E.M. Fluid Mechanics (pergamon, 1959)

Langlois, W.E. Slow Viscous Flow (Macmillan, 1964)

Pai, S.I. Viscous Flow Theory VoU (VanNostrand, 1956)

Rosenhead, 1. (ed.) lAminar Boundary Layers (Oxford U.P, 1963)

SECfrON SEVEN

Schlichting. H. Boundary Layer Theory (McGraw-Hill, 1968)

Teman,R. Nallier-Stolces Equations -Theory andNumericalAnalysis (North Holland, 1976)

MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS ECON401} AND ECONOMICS

24"1>+ 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics nIA and Economics mc and such additional work as is required for combined honours students by the Departments of Mathematics and/or Statistics.

Hours To be advised. A project of mathematical and economic significance jointly supervised.

Examination Assessment will be in the appropriate Mathematics and Economics topics. In addition, the project will be evaluated by independent examiners.

Content

The student shall complete not fewer than four 400 level Mathematics topics (24 credit points) and topics equivalent to 24 credit points from the 400 level Economics list chosen appropriately and approved jointly by the Heads of the Departments concerned.

MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PHYS401} AND PHYSICS

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Physics nIA and Mathematics rnA

Prerequisites 1991 Atleast four 300 level Mathematics subjects and Physics 301 with any other four Physics 300 level subjects

Hours To be advised and, in addition, a research project within the Department of Physics and/or Mathematics which may be jointly supervised.

Examination Assessment will be in the appropriate Physics 400 level and Mathematics 400 level topics selected. In addition, the research project will be assessed on the basis of a wriuen report and a seminar on the project.

Content

A combination of Mathematics 400 and Physics 400 level topics as approved by the Head of each Department, and either a Mathematics or Physics project as approved.

MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PSYC401} AND PSYCHOLOGY

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics rnA and Psychology me Hours To be advised.

Examination To be advised.

Content

To be advised. At least four 400 level Mathematics topiCS (24 credit points) togetherwith aselection of seminars from PSY C40l and/or PSYC402 which may include mathematical applications in Psychology.

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

PHYS40I} HONOURS IN PHYSICS PHYS402}

24cp;. 24cp

Prerequisites 1990 Physics IDA.Attention is drawn to degree requirements for Honours.

Prerequisites 1991 PHYS30l plus any other three PHYS300 subjeccs.It is expected that the level 300 Physics subjects will have been passed at Credit level or better.

Hours PHYS40l and 402 together comprise 115 hours of lectures plus a project.

Examination As required

Content

Physics 401 and 402 are intended to give students an advanced understanding of the fundamentals of modem physics appropriate for an Honours graduate in the discipline as well as an exposure to the current interests of the Department viz. solid stale and surface physics. space plasma physics. radar meteor physics, electromagneticsignalpropagalion.andaspectsofappliedphysics.

In 1990. these aims will be achieved by offering three compulsory core topics: Quantum Mechanics, Theoretical Solid State Physics and Plasma Physics.Optional topics include Relativity, Applied Nuclear Physics, Surface Physics, Atomic Collisions in Solids, Laser Physics, Particle Detection. Solar Terrestrial Physics, and Fourier Transforms. Additional topics may be added depending on visitors to the Department and all topics need not necessarily be offered in anyone year.

Texts As required.

PSYC401} HONOURS IN PSYCHOLOGY PSYC402}

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS)

24cp;. 24cp

24cp

Prerequisites 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology TID, and Psychology IDA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology InA OR in addition have a credit or above in Psychology IDB.

Prerequisites 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I. Psychology ITA. Psychology DB, PSYClOl, PSYClO2, PSYCl03 and PSYCl04. Candidates must have a credit or above in BOTH PSYC301 AND PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYCl05, PSYCl06, PSYC307, and PSYCl08 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.

Hours Twelve hours per week for the full year

Examination To be advised

Content

PSYC40l comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC402 as well; part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar

99

SECfION SEVEN

series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, a choice of two units in biological or physiological psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.

Texts To be advised

References To be advised

PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 24cp (THESIS)

Prerequisites 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I, Psychology IlA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology IlIA OR in addition havea credit or above in Psychology nIB.

Prerequisites 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) including the following subjects. Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC 302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have acredit or above in BOTH PSYeJOI and PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.

Corequisite PSYC401

Hours Twelve hours per week for the full year

Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supeIVisorand by another member, or members of the Department.

Content

PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC401 as well; part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a pieee of original empirical research. The thesis is a formal presentation of this research and must be in APA format. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.

Texts To be advised

References To be advised

GEOG40l} Honours in GEOGRAPHY GEOG402)

Prerequisite 1990 Geography rnA or IIIB

24cp+ 24cp

Prerequisites1991 GEOOI01 &GEOOI02pluseitherGEOG201 &GEOO301 orGEOG202&GEOO302Toqualifyforadmission

100

POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS

to the Honours Degree, a student must nonnally have completed sufficient training in geographical methods (i.e. GEOG201 and GEOG30\ for Physical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 forHumanGeography),andhavecompletedaMajorinGeography that includes GEOGIOI, GEOGI02, 18 credit points from level 200 courses and 24 credit points from level 300 courses. To proceed to Honours in Geography a student should have obtained an average of credit in the 300 level courses taken for the major plus at least 12 other points at credit level in their university courses. The student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of their ability in the area of study within which the proposed research topic lies.

Hours Twenty-four hours per week for each of two semesters

Examination External and internal examination of a research thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework.

Content

A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as prescribed.

Note: A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notify the Head of the Department by 1 October in the year that 300 Level subjects are completed and must confinn this as soon as final results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their theses after completion of their undergraduate degree studies.

HONOURS IN STATISTICS 48cp

Prerequisites 1990 Statistics III and another Part I1I subject.

Content

Students are required to take subjects worth 48 credit points of which at least 3 subjects must be chosen from Level 400 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.

Students are also required to complete project work which can be worth 12, 18 or 24 credit points, to be detennined by consultation with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one involving the analysis of data, or a theoretical one. Work on the project nonnally starts early in February.

Level 400 subjects offered in 1990 are:

STAT401 Probability Theory

STA T402 Analysis of Categorical Data

STAT403

STAT404

STAT405

STAT406

STAT408

STAT409

STAT410

STAT411

Demography and Survival Analysis

Robust Regression and Smoothing

Statistical Consulting

Methods for Quality Improvement

Project (6 credit points)

Project (12 credit points)

Project (18 credit points)

Project (24 credit points)

SEC/ION SEVEN

STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY 6cp

This is arigorous course on the mathematical theory of probability, presenting techniques and theory needed to establish limit theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Statistics. Topics covered include: elementary measure theory, random variables, expectation, the characteristic function, modes of convergence, laws· of large numbers, centra1limit theorems, law of the iterated logarithm.

References

Billingsley, P. Probability aruJ Measure (Wiley, 1979)

Breiman, L. Probability (Addison-Wesley, 1968)

Chung, K.L A course in Probability Theory 2nd oon.(Academic Press, 1974)

Moran, P.A.P. An Introduction to Probability Theory (Oxford U. P.,l968, 1984)

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 6cp

The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data It will begin with a thorough coverage of 2 x 2 tables before moving on to larger (r x c) contingency tables. Topics to be covered include probability models for categorical data, measures of association, measures of agreement, the Mantel-Haenszel method for combining tables, applications of logistic regres sion and loglinear models.

References

Bishop, Y.M.M., Feinberg, S.E. et al Discrete M ultivariat e Analysis: Theory aruJ Practice (MIT Press, 1975)

Fleiss, J.L. Statistical Methods for Rates aruJ Proportions 2nd edn (Wiley, 1982)

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL 6cp ANALYSIS

This course presents a mathematical treatment of the techniques used in population projections, manpower studies, and the suIVival models used in demography and biostatistics.

Text

Lawless, J. Statistical Models aruJ Methodsfor Lifetime Data (Wiley, 1982)

References

Cox, D.R. and Oakes, D. Analysis of Survival Data (Chapman & Hall, 1984)

Elandt-Johnson, R.C. and Johnson, N.L. Survival Models and Data Analysis (Wiley, 1980)

Kalbfleisch, J.D. and Prentice, R.L. The Statistical Analysis of Failure Time Data (Wiley, 1980)

POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS

Keyfitz, N. Applied Mathematical Demography (Wiley, 1977)

Keyfitz, N. Introduction to the Mathematics of Population (Addison­Wesley, 1968)

Pollard, J.H. Mathematical Models for the Growth of Human Populations (Cambridge V.P, 1975)

STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING

6cp

The main theme is the use of the computer to fit models to data when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied or when it is not known in advance what form of model is appropriate. Topics to becoveredinclude: concepts of robustness, L

1-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear regression,

scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel regression and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, and radical approaches (e.g. CART and projection pursuit).

References

Eubank, RL. Spline SmoothingandNonparametric Regression (Dekker, 1988)

Hampel, F.R. Ronchetti, E.M.et a1 Robust Statistics: the Approach Based on Influence Functions (Wiley, 1986)

Rousseeuw, P.J. and Leroy, A.M. Robust Regression and Outlier Detection (Wiley, 1987)

STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING 6cp

The aim of this course is to develop both the statistical and nonstatistical skills required for a successful consultant. The course includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of commonly-used statistical procedures, problem fonnulation and solving, analysis of data sets, report writing and oral presentation, role-playing and consulting with actual clients.

STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

6cp

The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow charts and Pareto diagrams will be covered, in addition to the various types of control charts and process capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process petformance will be included. The course is a practical one, and the issues involved in actually implementing a quality and productivity improvement programme in an organization will be addressed.

References To be advised

101

SECTION EIGHT

LIST OF SUBJECTS

LEVEL 100 SEMESTER SUBJECTS

Number

AVIA101

AVIA102

AVIAI03

AVIA104

AVIAI05

AVIAI06

AVIAI07

AVIA108

BIOL101

BIOL102

CHEMIOI

CHEM102

COMP101

GEOGIOI

GEOGI02

GEOL101

GEOLl02

INFOIOI

MATHI01

MATHl02

MATHI03

SUbject Name Credit Points

Introductory A vianon Science 6

futroductory Aviation Engineering 6

Introductory Human Factors in Aviation 6 Introductory Aviation Management 6

Aviation Science 6 Aviation Engineering 6

Aviation Psychology & Medicine 6

Aviation Management 6

Plant & Animal Biology 6 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 6

Chemistry 101 6 Chemistry 102 6 Computer Science 1 12

Introduction to Physical Geography 6

Introduction to Human Geography 6

The Environment 6 Earth Materials 6 Introduction to Infonnation Systems 6

Mathematics 101 6 Mathematics 102 6

Mathematics 103 6

MATHl99 Transition Mathematics

(=Mathematics 102 pre-1990) o

102

PHYSIOI Physics 101

PHYS102 Physics 102

PHYSI03 Physics 103 PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction 1 PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 STA TIOt Introductory Statistics

LEVEL 200 SEMESTER SUBJECTS

A VIA201 Aviation Meteorology. Navigation

& Instruments A VIA202 Principles of Flight, & Jet Aircraft

Perfonnance A VIA203 Human Factors in Aviation

A VIA204 Meteorology & High Speed!

AVIA205

AVIA206

BIOL201

BIOL202

BIOL203

BIOL204

BIOL205

BIOL206

High Altitude Navigation Aerodynamics, Engines & Aircraft Systems A vialion Instruction Biochemistry Animal Physiology Population Dynamics Cell & Molecular Biology

Molecular Genetics Plant Physiology

6 6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6 6 6 6

6

6

6 6 6

SECfION EIGHT

CHEM201 Analytical Chemistry

CHEM202 Inorganic Chemistry CHEM203 Organic Chemistry CHEM204 Physical Otemistry CHEM205 Applied Chemistry 205

CHEM206 Applied Chemistry 206

COMP201 Advanced Data Structures

COMP202 Computer Architecture

COMP203 Assembly Language

6

6

6

6 6

6

3

3 3

COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 3

COMP205 Programming in C COMP206

COMP241

EDUC211

EDUC212

GEOG201

GEOG202

GEOG203

GEOG204

GEOG205

GEOG206

GEOL201

GEOL202

GEOL203

GEOL204 GEOL205

GEOL206

GEOL207

MATH201

MATH202

MATH203

MATH204

MATH205

MATH206

MATH207

MATH208

MATH209

MATH210

MATH211

MATH212

MATH213 MATH214

MATH215

MATH216

PHYS201

PHYS202

Theory of Computation Cognitive Science

Mathematics Education 211 Mathematics Education 212 Methods in Physical Geography Methods in Human Geography Biogeography and Climatology Geomorphology of Australia Contemporary Australia & East Asia Socia-Economic Geography Mineralogy Petrology Palaeoenvironments

Structural & Resource Geology

Geology Field Course 205

Geology Field Course 206

Geology Field Course 207

Multivariable Calculus

Partial Differential Equations 1

Ordinary Differential Equations 1

Real Analysis

Analysis - Metric Spaces

Complex Analysis 1

Complex Analysis 2

Linear Algebra 1

Linear Algebra 2

Geometry 1

Group Theory

Discrete Mathematics

Mathematical Modelling

Mechanics

Operations Research

Numerical Analysis

Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism

Mechanics & Thermal Physics

PHYS203 Solid SlaI:e & Atomic Physics

PHYS204 Electronics & Instrumentation

PSYC201 Foundations for Psychology

PSYC202 Basic Processes

3

3

6 6

6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

3

6 3

6

6

6

3

3 3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3 3

3

3

3

3

3 6 6

6

6

6

6

LIST OF SUBJECTS

PSYC203 Developmental & Social Processes 6 6 6 6

6

6 3 3 3

PSYC204 Individual Processes

PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1

PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2

STA 1'201 Mathematical Statistics

STA1'202 Regression Analysis

ST A 1'203 Queues and Simulation

STA 1'204 Non-parametric Statistics

STA 1'205 Engineering Statistics

LEVEL 300 SEMESTER SUBJECTS

AVIA301

AVIA302

AVIA303

AVIA304

BI0L301

BI0L302

BI0L303

B10L304

BI0L305

BIOL306

BI0L307

BI0L308

BI0L309

CHEM301

CHEM302

CHEM303

CHEM304

CHEM305

CHEM306

CHEM307

CHEM308

COMP301

COMP302

COMP303

COMP304

COMP305

COMP306

COMP307 COMP308

EDUC311

Advanced Aviation Engineering

& Structures

Advanced Aircraft Operations

& Meteorology

Aviation Engineering & Supersonic

Aerodynamics

Advanced Navigation & Meteorology

Cell Processes

Reproductive Physiology

Environmental Plant Physiology

Whole Plant Development

Immunology

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6 6

Ecology & Evolution 6

Molecular Biology of Plant Development 6

Mammalian Development 6

Molecular Biology 6

Instrument Analysis & Cluomatography 6

Trace Analysis & Chemometrics 6

Coordination & Organometallic Chemistry 6

Bioinorganic & Cluster Chemistry 6

Mechanistic & Synthetic Organic Chemistry 6

Heterocyclic & Biological Organic

Chemistry 6

Electrodics & Quantum Chemistry 6

Photoelectron Spectroscopy &

Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 6

Compiler Design 6

Artificial Intelligence 6

Computer Networks 6

Database Design 6

Design and Analysis of Algorilhms 6

Computer Graphics 6

Software Engineering Principles 6 Operating Systems 6

Mathematics Education 311 6

EDUC312 Mathematics Education 312 6

G8OO301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 6

G8OO302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 6

GEOG303 Geography of Aboriginal Australia 6

103

SECTION EIGHT LIST OF SUBJECTS

Number SUbject Name Credit LEVEL 400 SEMESTER SUBJECTS Points

GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 6 BIOLAOI Biology Honours 40) 24

GEOG305 Climatic Problems 6 BIOLA02 Biology Honours 402 24

GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An Historical CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401 24

Perspective 6 CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 24

GEOG307 The Hydrosphere 6 GEOG401 Geography Honours 401 24

GEOG308 Basic Needs & Patterns of Inequality 6 GEOG402 Geography Honours 402 24

GOOLJOl Earth Processes 1 6 GEOLAOI Geology Honours 401 24

GooLJ02 Earth Processes 2 6 GEOLA02 Geology Honours 402 24

GooLJ03 Earth Materials 1 6 MATH401 MaUtematics Honours 401 24

GOOLJ04 Earth Materials 2 6 MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 24

GOOLJ05 Earth Resources 12 PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 24

GOOLJ06 Applied Geology 12 PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 24

MATH301 Logic & Set Theory 6 PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401 24

MATH302 General Tensors and Relativity 6 PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 24

MATH303 Variational Methods & Integral Equations 6 PSYC403 Psychology 403 16

MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 6 PSYC404 Psychology 404 32

MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 6 STAT401 Probability Theory 6

MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 6 STAT402 Analysis of Categorical Data 6

MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 6 STAT403 Demography and Survival Analysis 6

MATH308 Geometry 2 6 STAT404 Robust Regression and Smoothing 6

MATH309 Combinatorics 6 STAT405 Statistical Consulting 6

MATH310 Functional Analysis 6 STAT406 MeUtods for Q.tality Improvement 6

MATH311 Measure Theory and Integration 6 STAT408 Project 6

MATH312 Algebra 6 STAT409 Project 12

MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 6 STAT410 Project 18

MATH314 Optimization 6 STAT411 Project 24

MATH315 Mathematical Biology 6

MATH316 Industrial Modelling 6

MATH317 Number Theory 6

PHYS301 Mathematical Methods &

Quantum Mechanics 6

PHYS302 Electromagnetism & Electronics 6

PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 6

PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 6

PHYS305 Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism 6

PSYeJOl Advanced Foundations for Psychology 6

PSYeJ02 Independent Project 6

PSYeJ03 Advanced Basic Processes 1 6

PSYeJ04 Advanced Basic Processes 2 6

PSYeJ05 Individual Processes 6

PSYeJ06 Advanced Social Processes 6

PSYeJ07 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 6

PSYeJ08 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 6

STATIOI Statistical Inference 6

STATI02 Study Design 6 STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 6 STATI04 Time Series Analysis 6

104

, c

& AI- \._~,.o ~ t \. .-- 1'50 200 250 met, ...

,

f ;;~1\~¥1}:;~;';~{}"

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS MAP

SITE GUIDE by BUILDING NUMBER N Architecture A McMullin p Drama Theatre

Administration· Arts Q Drama Studio Student Services - Cashier R Social Sciences Computing Centre - EEO Geogmphy - Drama

Social Sciences Community Programmes Commerce - Economics AN Central Animal House Law - Management AS Central Animal Store

SB Post Office B Ledure Theatre BOI SC Auchmuty Sports Centre C Geology SH SlaffHouse CB Commonwealth Bank SP Sports Pavilion CC Child Care Centre (Kintaiha)

Squash Courts - Oval No.2 CG Central Garage TA Turua Annexe CT Computer Teacbing TB Temporary Buildings 0 Physics

Careers & Student Employment E Lecture Tbeatre EO! Chaplain, - Sport & Recreation EA Engineering Administration Student Accommodation EB Cbemical & Materials

TC Tennis Courts Engineering TH The Hunter Technology EC Mechanical Engineering

Development Centre ED Civil Engineering & U Union Surveying V Mathematics EE Electrical & Computer

Computer Science - Statistics Engineering Radio station 2NUR-FM EF Engineering Classrooms

W Behavioural Sciences EG Bulk Solids Engineering Education - Psychology ES Engineering Science Sociology G Chemistry

GH Great Hall H Baselen Theatre HOI HA·HZ Edwards Hall HHA·HHF Hunter House I Medical Sciences Lecture

Tbeatre K202 IA·IE International House J Biological Sciences K Medical Sciences L Auchmuty Library M Cbemical & Materials

Engineering

, , ,

, , ,"---

~

ALPHABETICAL LOCATION GUIDE

Administration in McMullin A Animal House--Central AN Arts in McMu!Iin A Architecture N Basden Theatre HOI H Behavioural Sciences W Biological Sciences J BOI Lecture Theatre B Bulk Solids Engineering EG Careers & Student Employment in Temp. Bldgs TB

Cashier in MCMullin A Central Garage CG Materials Engineering in Chemical & Materials Engineering M

Chemistry G Chaplains in Temp. Bldg' TB Chemical & Materials Eng. EB Child Care Centre (Kintaiba) CC Civil Eng. & Surveying ED Commerce in Social Sciences S Commonwealth Bank CB Community Programmes in McMullin A

Computer Science in Mathematics V Computing Centre in McMullin A Computer Teaching Building CT Drama in Social Sciences R Drama Studio Q Drama Theatre P Economics in Social Sciences S Education in Behavioural Sciences W Edwards Hall Administration & Dining HA Burnett House HB Cutler House HC Self-catering Houses HF·HZ

EEO in McMu!Iin A ElectriCal & Computer Eng. EE

__ ------"i , , , , , ,

;~"",

,/

, , , ,

/

, , , , , , ,

/ /

, , "

Engineering Administration Engineering Classrooms Engineering Science EOI Lecture Theatre Geography in Social Sciences Geology Great Hall Hunter House International House Stage I Stage 2

K202 Medical Sciences Lecture Theatre

Law in Social Sciences Library-Auchmuty McMullin Management in Social Sciences Mathematics Mechanical Engineering Medical Sciences Physics Post Office Psycbology in Social Sciences Radio Station 2NUR.FM in Mathematics

Sociology in Social Sciences Sports Centre-Aucbmuty Sports Pavilion

, , , ,

INDEX

EA EF ES E R C GH

HHA·HHF

IA·IC ID ·IE

I S L A S V EC K D SB W

V W SC SP

Sport & Recreation in Tem~. ~ldgs TB Squash Courts in Sports Pavilion SP Staff House SH Statistics in Mathematics V Student Accommodation in Temporuy Building, TB

Student Services in McMullin A The Hunter Technology Development Centre TH Temporary Buildings TB Tennis Courts TC Tunra Annexe TA Union U